Triazolopyrazine compounds useful for the treatment of degenerative and inflammatory diseases

ABSTRACT

Novel [1.2.4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine compounds are disclosed that have a formula represented by the following: 
     
       
         
         
             
             
         
       
     
     The compounds may be prepared as pharmaceutical compositions, and may be used for the prevention and treatment of a variety of conditions in mammals including humans, including by way of non-limiting example, pain, inflammation, and others.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

The present application is a continuation of non-provisional application Ser. No. 11/809,294 filed May 30, 2007 U.S. Pat. No. 7,501,411, which, in turn, claims the priority of provisional application U.S. Ser. No. 60/803,552 filed on May 31, 2006, Ser. Nos. 60/931,764, 60/931,844 and 60/931,763 now abandoned, all bearing the same title as the present application and filed on May 25, 2007, and Ser. No. 60/932,100 likewise bearing the same title as that of the present application and filed May 29, 2007; and the disclosures of all such applications are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. Applicants claim the benefits of such applications under 35 U.S.C. §119(e).

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to a class of triazolopyrazine compounds capable of binding to the active site of a serine/threonine kinase, the expression of which is involved in the pathway resulting in the degradation of extra-cellular matrix (ECM), joint degeneration and diseases involving such degradation and/or inflammation.

Diseases involving the degradation of extra-cellular matrix include, but are not limited to, psoriatic arthritis, juvenile arthritis, early arthritis, reactive arthritis, osteoarthritis, ankylosing spondylitis, osteoporosis, muskulo skeletal diseases like tendonitis and periodontal disease, cancer metastasis, airway diseases (COPD, asthma), renal and liver fibrosis, cardiovascular diseases like atherosclerosis and heart failure, and neurological diseases like neuroinflammation and multiple sclerosis. Diseases involving primarily joint degeneration include, but are not limited to, psoriatic arthritis, juvenile arthritis, early arthritis, reactive arthritis, osteoarthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis.

Rheumatoid arthritis (RA) is a chronic joint degenerative disease, characterized by inflammation and destruction of the joint structures. When the disease is unchecked, it leads to substantial disability and pain due to loss of joint functionality and even premature death. The aim of an RA therapy, therefore, is not to slow down the disease but to attain remission in order to stop the joint destruction. Besides the severity of the disease outcome, the high prevalence of RA (˜0.8% of adults are affected worldwide) means a high socioeconomic impact. (For reviews on RA, we refer to Smolen and Steiner (2003); Lee and Weinblatt (2001); Choy and Panayi (2001); O'Dell (2004) and Firestein (2003)).

Although it is widely accepted that RA is an auto-immune disease, there is no consensus concerning the precise mechanisms driving the ‘initiation stage’ of the disease. What is known is that the initial trigger(s) does mediate, in a predisposed host, a cascade of events that leads to the activation of various cell types (B-cells, T-cells, macrophages, fibroblasts, endothelial cells, dendritic cells and others). Concomitantly, an increased production of various cytokines is observed in the joints and tissues surrounding the joint (e.g. TNF-α, IL-6, IL-1, IL-15, IL-18 and others). When the disease progresses, the cellular activation and cytokine production cascade becomes self-perpetuating. At this early stage, the destruction of joint structures is already very clear at this early stage. Thirty percent of the patients have radiographic evidence of bony erosions at the time of diagnosis and this proportion increases to 60 percent after two years.

Histological analysis of the joints of RA patients clearly evidences the mechanisms involved in the RA-associated degradative processes. This analysis shows that the main effector responsible for RA-associated joint degradation is the pannus, where the synovial fibroblast, by producing diverse proteolytic enzymes, is the prime driver of cartilage and bone erosion. A joint classically contains two adjacent bones that articulate on a cartilage layer and are surrounded by the synovial membrane and joint capsule. In the advanced RA patient, the synovium of joint increases in size to form the pannus, due to the proliferation of the synovial fibroblasts and the infiltration of mononuclear cells such as T-cells, B-cells, monocytes, macrophages and neutrophils. The pannus mediates the degradation of the adjacent cartilage, leading to the narrowing of the joint space, and has the potential to invade adjacent bone and cartilage. As bone and cartilage tissues are composed mainly of collagen type I or II, respectively, the pannus destructive and invasive properties are mediated by the secretion of collagenolytic proteases, principally the matrix metallo proteinases (MMPs). The erosion of the bone under and adjacent to the cartilage is also part of the RA process, and results principally from the presence of osteoclasts at the interface of bone and pannus. Osteoclasts are multinucleated cells that, upon adhesion to the bone tissue, form a closed compartment, within which the osteoclasts secrete proteases (Cathepsin K, MMP9) that degrade the bone tissue. The osteoclast population in the joint is abnormally increased by osteoblast formation from precursor cells induced by the secretion of the receptor activator of NFκB ligand (RANKL) by activated SFs and T-cells.

Various collagen types have a key role in defining the stability of the extracellular matrix (ECM). Collagens type I and collagen type II, for example, are the main components of bone and cartilage, respectively. Collagen proteins typically organise into multimeric structures referred to as collagen fibrils. Native collagen fibrils are very resistant to proteolytic cleavage. Only a few types of ECM-degrading proteins have been reported to have the capacity to degrade native collagen: MMPs and Cathepsins. Among the Cathepsins, cathepsin K, which is active mainly in osteoclasts, is the best characterised. Among the MMPs, MMP1, MMP2, MMP8 MMP13 and MMP14 are known to have collagenolytic properties. The correlation between an increased expression of MMP1 by synovial fibroblasts (SFs) and the progression of the arthritic disease is well-established and is predictive for joint erosive processes (Cunnane et al., 2001). In the context of RA, therefore, MMP1 represents a highly relevant collagen degrading protein. In vitro, the treatment of cultured SFs with cytokines relevant in the RA pathology (e.g. TNF-α and IL1β) will increase the expression of MMP1 by these cells (Andreakos et al., 2003). Monitoring the levels of MMP1 expressed by SFs therefore is a relevant readout in the field of RA as it is indicative for the activation of SFs towards an erosive phenotype that, in vivo, is responsible for cartilage degradation. Inhibition of the MMP1 expression by SFs represents a valuable therapeutic approach towards the treatment of RA.

The activity of the ECM-degrading proteins can also be causative or correlate with the progression of various diseases different from RA, as e.g. other diseases that involve the degradation of the joints. These diseases include, but are not limited to, psoriatic arthritis, juvenile arthritis, early arthritis, reactive arthritis, osteoarthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis. Other diseases that may be treatable with compounds identified according to the present invention and using the targets involved in the expression of MMPs as described herein are osteoporosis, muscular skeletal diseases like tendonitis and periodontal disease (Gapski et al., 2004), cancer metastasis (Coussens et al., 2002), airway diseases (COPD, asthma) (Suzuki et al., 2004), lung, renal fibrosis (Schanstra et al., 2002), liver fibrosis associated with chronic hepatitis C (Reiff et al., 2005), cardio-vascular diseases like atherosclerosis and heart failure (Creemers et al., 2001), and neurological diseases like neuroinflammation and multiple sclerosis (Rosenberg, 2002). Patients suffering from such diseases may benefit from stabilizing the ECM (by protecting it from degradation).

The 471-amino acid serine/threonine kinase identified as Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase-Activated Protein Kinase 5 (MAPKAPK5 or PRAK) is expressed in a wide panel of tissues. The protein contains its catalytic domain at the N-terminal end and both a nuclear localization signal (NLS) and nuclear export signal (NES) at its C-terminal end. Endogenous MAPKAPK5 is predominantly present in the cytoplasm, but stress or cytokine activation of the cells mediates its translocation into the nucleus (New et al., 2003). This event is dependent on phosphorylation of MAPKAPK5. Thr182 is the regulatory phosphorylation site of MAPKAPK5. Although the p38α kinase is able to phosphorylate MAPKAPK5 in an overexpression setting, experiments with endogenous MAPKAPK5 do not support this hypothesis (Shi et al., 2003). MAPKAPK5 knock-out mice have been generated that are viable and fertile. The phenotype of these mice is quite different from that of mice deficient for MAPKAPK2, a MAPKAPK5 related kinase that is regulated by p38α (Shi et al., 2003). This indicates that the function of each protein is distinct and that neither kinase can compensate for the other's activity. Taken together, MAPKAPK5 and MAPKAPK2 represent distinct targets with a non-redundant role. MAPK6 (also referred to as ERK3) has recently been identified as a physiologically relevant substrate for MAPKAPK5, defining a novel signal transduction pathway (Seternes et al., 2004).

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

NSAIDS (Non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs) are used to reduce the pain associated with RA and improve life quality of the patients. These drugs will not, however, put a brake on the RA-associated joint destruction.

Corticosteroids were found to decrease the progression of RA as detected radiographically and are used at low doses to treat part of the RA patients (30 to 60%). Serious side effects, however, are associated with long corticosteroid use (Skin thinning, osteoporosis, cataracts, hypertension, hyperlipidemia).

Synthetic DMARDs (Disease-Modifying Anti-Rheumatic Drugs) (e.g. methotrexate, leflunomide, sulfasalazine) mainly tackle the immuno-inflammatory component of RA. As a main disadvantage, these drugs only have a limited efficacy (joint destruction is only slowed down but not blocked by DMARDs such that disease progression in the long term continues). The lack of efficacy is indicated by the fact that, on average, only 30% of the patients achieve an ACR40 score after 24 months treatment with methotrexate. This means that, according to the American College of Rheumatology, only 30% of the patients do achieve a 50% improvement of their symptoms (O'Dell et al., 1996). In addition, the precise mechanism of action of DMARDs is often unclear.

Biological DMARDs (Infliximab, Etanercept, Adalimumab, Rituximab, CTLA4-Ig) are therapeutic proteins that do inactivate cytokines (e.g. TNF-α) or cells (e.g. T-cells or B-cells) that have an important role in the RA pathophysiology (Kremer et al., 2003; Edwards et al., 2004). Although the TNF-α-blockers (Infliximab, Etanercept, Adalimumab) and methotrexate combination therapy is the most effective RA treatment currently available, it is striking that even this therapy only achieves a 50% improvement (ACR40) in disease symptoms in 50-60% of patients after 12 months therapy (St Clair et al., 2004). Some adverse events warnings for anti-TNF-α drugs exist, shedding a light on the side effects associated to this type of drugs. Increased risk for infections (tuberculosis) hematologic events and demyelinating disorders have been described for the TNF-α blockers (see also Gomez-Reino et al., 2003). Besides the serious side effects, the TNF-α blockers do also share the general disadvantages of the biological class of therapeutics, which are the unpleasant way of administration (frequent injections accompanied by infusion site reactions) and the high production cost. Newer agents in late development phase target T-cell co-stimulatory molecules and B-cells. The efficacy of these agents is expected to be similar to that of the TNF-α blockers. The fact that a variety of targeted therapies have similar but limited efficacies, suggests that there is a multiplicity of pathogenic factors for RA. This is also indicative for the deficiencies in our understanding of pathogenic events relevant to RA.

The current therapies for RA are not satisfactory due to a limited efficacy (No adequate therapy exists for 30% of the patients). This calls for additional strategies to achieve remission. Remission is required since residual disease bears the risk of progressive joint damage and thus progressive disability. Inhibiting the immuno-inflammatory component of the RA disease, which represents the main target of drugs currently used for RA treatment, does not result in a blockade of joint degradation, the major hallmark of the disease.

US 2005/0009832 describes substituted [1.2.4]triazolo[1,2-a]pyrazine-8-yl-amines as modulators of protein kinases, including MAPKAPK5. WO02/056888 describes inhibitors of MAPKAPK5 as TNF modulators able to regulate the expression of certain cytokines. Neither of these prior art references discloses any compound within the scope of the class of compounds described herein below.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention is based on the discovery of that MAPKAPK5 functions in the pathway that results in the expression of MMP1, and that inhibitors of MAPKAPK5 activity, such as the compounds of the present invention, are useful for the treatment of diseases involving the abnormally high expression of MMP activity.

The present matrix metallo proteinase inhibiting compounds of the present invention may be described generally as [1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine-8-yl-amines substituted in the 5-position by an aryl and heteroaryl group, and an in the 8-position by an arylamino or a heteroarylamino group.

More particularly, the present invention relates to compounds having matrix metallo proteinase inhibiting properties in a mammalian cell, according to formula (I):

wherein:

-   A and B are independently CR2R″, NR″, oxygen or sulphur; -   AA is CR2 or N; -   D is C═O, CR2R″ or NR″; -   E is NH or CR″R6, when k is zero, and is NH or CR″R6a, when k is     one; -   F is sulphur, oxygen or NH; -   T is oxygen or NR; -   U, V, W and X are independently CR″R7 or NR″; -   Y is CR″ or N; -   Z is hydrogen, amino, hydroxyl, lower alkoxy, carbamoyl, carboxyl,     SO₂Rz, SO₂NRRz, —NR(CO)(CH2)d-Rz, —NRRz, —(CO)—ORz,     —(CO)—NR(CH2)d-Rz, or

-   R is independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; -   R″ is H or forms a double bond with an adjacent atom; -   R1 is H; R2; or lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl and lower alkyl-lower     cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with one or more R2; -   R3 is H or forms a double bond with an adjacent R″; -   R2 is H, F, Cl; CN; COOR4; OR4; C(O)N(R4R5); S(O)₂N(R4R5); lower     alkyl; O-lower alkyl; NH-lower alkyl; S-lower alkyl; COO-lower     alkyl; OC(O)-lower alkyl; C(O)N(R4)-lower alkyl; S(O)₂N(R4)-lower     alkyl; S(O)N(R4)-lower alkyl; S(O)₂-lower alkyl; S(O)-lower alkyl;     N(R4)S(O)₂-lower alkyl; and N(R4)S(O)-lower alkyl; wherein each     lower alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more of F and Cl; -   R4 and R5 are independently     -   H; F, Cl; or lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl, or lower alkyl-lower         cycloalkyl optionally substituted with one or more of F and Cl; -   R6 is hydrogen, amino, hydroxyl, carbamoyl, carboxyl, SO₂R, NRR′,     —(CO)—OR, or —(CO)—NRR′; -   R6a is R6, Cl, F, lower alkoxy, cyano, trifluoromethoxy; or together     with the adjacent be —(CHR″)_(n)—NR—(CHR″)_(p)—, and form a five or     six member heterocyclic ring fused to the ring to which they are     bonded; -   R7 is independently hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl or lower alkoxy; -   Rz is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkanoyl, phenyl, 1-loweralkyl     pyrrolidin-3-yl, pyrazol-4-yl, pyrazol-2-yl, or lower alkyl, lower     alkanoyl, phenyl, 1-loweralkyl pyrrolidin-3-yl, pyrazol-4-yl,     pyrazol-2-yl or pyrid-3-yl substituted by one or more of hydroxyl,     amino, mono- or di-loweralkylamino, acetamidyl, lower alkanoyl,     lower alkyl, 4-hydroxy-phenyl, 3-aminomethylphenyl, lower alkyl     sulfonyl, 4-diloweralkylaminophenyl, pyrid-3-yl, 1H-indol-3-yl,     morpholin-4-yl; -   R and Rz together may be —(CHR)_(q)-T-(CHR)_(r)— and form a five or     six member heterocyclic ring with the nitrogen to which they are     bonded; -   Rz and R7 together may be —(CHR″), —NR—(CHR″)_(p)—, and form a five     or six member heterocyclic ring fused to the ring to which they are     bonded; -   b and d are independently 0 or 1; provided at least one of b or d is     1; -   k is 0 or 1; -   m is 0 or 1; -   n and p are independently 0, 1 or 2; -   q and r are 1 or 2; -   x is o or 1;     -   with the provisos that at least one of R7 or Rz is other than         hydrogen;         or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or         prodrug thereof.

Another aspect of the present invention is compounds according to formula III:

wherein

R¹ is H, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl; and each of R⁸ and R⁹ is independently selected from substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof; and stereoisomers, isotopic variants and tautomers thereof.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrimidine, and substituted or unsubstituted pyrazine, substituted or unsubstituted pyrrole, substituted or unsubstituted pyrazole and substituted or unsubstituted imidazole.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R¹ is H, Me, Et, i-Pr or CF₃.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R¹ is H.

Another aspect of the present invention relates to compounds according to formula IVa, IVb, IVc, or IVd:

and wherein L is a bond, —CO—, —O(CH₂)_(m1)—, —CON(H)(CH₂)_(m1)—, or —NHCO—; the subscript m1 is selected from 1-4; the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl; the subscript n is selected from 1-4; each R^(8a) is independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, carbamoyl, CHO, and halo; and R⁹ is independently selected from substituted or unsubstituted aryl and heteroaryl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof; and stereoisomers, isotopic variants and tautomers thereof.

In a one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-IVd, R⁹ is substituted or unsubstituted aryl. In another embodiment, R⁹ is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.

In a one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-IVd, R⁹ is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. In another embodiment, R⁹ is substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl.

In a one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-IVd, R⁹ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, indolyl, isoinolyl, pyrrolyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, and thiazolyl.

In a further aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a triazolopyrazine compound of the invention, and a pharmaceutical carrier, excipient or diluent. In this aspect of the invention, the pharmaceutical composition can comprise one or more of the compounds described herein. Moreover, the compounds of the present invention useful in the pharmaceutical compositions and treatment methods disclosed herein, are all pharmaceutically acceptable as prepared and used.

Another aspect of this invention relates to the use of the present compound in a therapeutic method, a pharmaceutical composition, and the manufacture of such composition, useful for the treatment of diseases involving inflammation, collagen degradation, and in particular, diseases characteristic of abnormal matrix metallo protease (MMP1) and/or Mitogen-Activated Protein-Kinase Activated Protein Kinase 5 (MAPKAPK5) activity, of which rheumatoid arthritis (RA) is a particular such disease. This invention also relates to processes for the preparation of the present compounds.

Other objects and advantages will become apparent to those skilled in the art from a consideration of the ensuing detailed description, which proceeds with reference to the following illustrative drawings.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1. This diagram shows the striking histological differences between a healthy joint and that of a RA patient.

FIG. 2. This chart shows the increased expression of MMP1 in synovial fibroblasts triggered with cytokines involved in rheumatoid arthritis pathology.

FIG. 3. This graph shows the dose-dependent inhibition of the “TNF-α-based trigger”-induced expression of MMP1 by SFs by a known anti-inflammatory compound.

FIG. 4. This gel shows the reduction, at the protein level, of the expression of MAPKAPK5 in SFs by infection of the cells with Ad-siRNA virus targeting MAPKAPK5.

FIG. 5. This chart shows the reduction of ‘complex trigger’ induced levels of MMP1 expression by SFs by an Ad-siRNA virus targeting MAPKAPK5.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION Definitions

When describing the compounds, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods of using such compounds and compositions, the following terms have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated. It should also be understood that any of the moieties defined forth below may be substituted with a variety of substituents, and that the respective definitions are intended to include such substituted moieties within their scope. By way of non-limiting example, such substituents may include e.g. halo (such as fluoro, chloro, bromo), —CN, —CF₃, —OH, —OCF₃, C₂-C₆ alkenyl, C₃-C₆ alkynyl, C₁-C₆ alkoxy, aryl and di-C₁-C₆ alkylamino. It should be further understood that the terms “groups” and “radicals” can be considered interchangeable when used herein.

“Alkoxy” means alkyl-O—. Exemplary alkoxy includes methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, i-propoxy, n-butoxy, and heptoxy. Preferred alkoxy groups are lower alkoxy.

“Alkyl” means straight or branched aliphatic hydrocarbon having 1 to about 20 carbon atoms. Preferred alkyl has 1 to about 12 carbon atoms. More preferred is lower alkyl. Branched means that one or more lower alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl or propyl is attached to a linear alkyl chain.

“Alkyl amino” means alkyl-NH—. Preferred alkyl amino is (C₁-C₆)-alkyl amino. Exemplary alkyl amino includes methylamino and ethylamino.

“Amino lower alkanoyl” means NH₂—R—CO—, where R is lower alkylene. Preferred groups include aminoethanoyl and aminoacetyl.

“Carbamoyl lower alkyl” means the radical NH₂CO-lower alkyl-. Preferred groups include carbamoylethyl and carbamoylmethyl.

“Carboxy lower alkyl ester” means a lower alkyl ester of a carboxy radical, —COO— group.

“Compounds of the present invention”, and equivalent expressions, are meant to embrace compounds of Formula (I, II or III) as hereinbefore described, which expression includes the prodrugs, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and the solvates, e.g., hydrates, where the context so permits. Similarly, reference to intermediates, whether or not they themselves are claimed, is meant to embrace their salts, and solvates, where the context so permits.

“Expression” means endogenous expression.

“Halo” or “halogen” means fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo.

“Hydrogen” means in the context of a substituent that —H is present at the compound position and also includes its isotope, deuterium.

“Lower alkanoyl amino” means an amino group with an organic functional group R—CO—, where R represents a lower alkyl group.

“Lower alkyl” means 1 to about 6 carbon atoms in a linear alkyl chain that may be straight or branched.

“Lower alkoxy” means 1 to about 6 carbon atoms in a linear alkyl chain that may be straight or branched, and that is bonded by an oxygen atom.

“Lower alkyl sulphonamide” refers to a lower alkyl amide of sulphonamide of the formula —SO₂NR*R*, where R* is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and at least one R* is lower alkyl.

“Prophylaxis” means a measure taken for the prevention of a disease.

“Solvate” means a physical association of a compound useful in this invention with one or more solvent molecules. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. “Solvate” encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates. The compounds of the invention may be prepared e.g. in crystalline form and may be solvated or hydrated. Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates, such as hydrates, and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates. Conventional solvents include water, ethanol, acetic acid and the like, therefore, representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates and methanolates.

“Substituted” means that one atom or group of atoms in a molecule is replaced by another atom or group.

“Sulphonamide” refers to a group of compounds containing the chemical group —SO₂NH₂.

“Therapeutically effective amount” means that amount of a drug or pharmaceutical agent that will elicit the biological or medical response of a subject that is being sought by a medical doctor or other clinician. The “therapeutically effective amount” can vary depending on the compound, the disease and its severity, and the age, weight, etc., of the subject to be treated. In particular, with regard to treating an disease condition characterized by the degradation of extracellular matrix, the term “effective matrix metallo-protease inhibiting amount” is intended to mean that effective amount of an compound of the present invention that will bring about a biologically meaningful decrease in the production of MMP-1 in the subject's disease affected tissues such that extracellular matrix degradation is meaningfully reduced. A compound having matrix metallo-protease inhibiting properties or a “matrix metallo-protease inhibiting compound” means a compound of the present invention that provided to a cell in effective amounts is able to cause a biologically meaningful decrease in the production of MMP-I in such cells.

“Aryl” refers to a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system. Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexylene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene, trinaphthalene and the like. Particularly, an aryl group comprises from 6 to 14 carbon atoms.

“Substituted Aryl” includes those groups recited in the definition of “substituted” herein, and particularly refers to an aryl group that may optionally be substituted with 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, particularly 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thiol, alkyl-S(O)—, aryl-S(O)—, alkyl-S(O)₂— and aryl-S(O)₂—.

“Bicycloaryl” refers to a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent bicycloaromatic ring system. Typical bicycloaryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from indane, indene, naphthalene, tetrahydronaphthalene, and the like. Particularly, an aryl group comprises from 8 to 11 carbon atoms.

“Bicycloheteroaryl” refers to a monovalent bicycloheteroaromatic group derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single atom of a parent bicycloheteroaromatic ring system. Typical bicycloheteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from benzofuran, benzimidazole, benzindazole, benzdioxane, chromene, chromane, cinnoline, phthalazine, indole, indoline, indolizine, isobenzofuran, isochromene, isoindole, isoindoline, isoquinoline, benzothiazole, benzoxazole, naphthyridine, benzoxadiazole, pteridine, purine, benzopyran, benzpyrazine, pyridopyrimidine, quinazoline, quinoline, quinolizine, quinoxaline, benzomorphan, tetrahydroisoquinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, and the like. Preferably, the bicycloheteroaryl group is between 9-11 membered bicycloheteroaryl, with 5-10 membered heteroaryl being particularly preferred. Particular bicycloheteroaryl groups are those derived from benzothiophene, benzofuran, benzothiazole, indole, quinoline, isoquinoline, benzimidazole, benzoxazole and benzdioxane.

“Carbamoyl” refers to the radical —C(O)N(R⁴²)₂ where each R⁴² group is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl or aryl, as defined herein, which may be optionally substituted as defined herein. In a specific embodiment, the term “carbamoyl” refers to —C(O)—NH₂.

“Cycloalkyl” refers to cyclic hydrocarbyl groups having from 3 to about 10 carbon atoms and having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings, including fused and bridged ring systems, which optionally can be substituted with from 1 to 3 alkyl groups. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, 1-methylcyclopropyl, 2-methylcyclopentyl, 2-methylcyclooctyl, and the like, and multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like.

“Substituted cycloalkyl” includes those groups recited in the definition of “substituted” herein, and particularly refers to a cycloalkyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl-S(O)—, aryl-S(O)—, alkyl-S(O)₂— and aryl-S(O)₂—.

“Substituted” refers to a group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently replaced with the same or different substituent(s). Typical substituents include, but are not limited to, —X, —R⁴⁶, —O⁻, ═O, —OR⁴⁶, —SR⁴⁶, —S⁻, ═S, —NR⁴⁶R⁴⁷, ═NR⁴⁶, —CX₃, —CF₃, —CN, —OCN, —SCN, —NO, —NO₂, ═N₂, —N₃, —S(O)₂O⁻, —S(O)₂OH, —S(O)₂R⁴⁶, —OS(O₂)O⁻, —OS(O)₂R⁴⁶, —P(O)(O⁻)₂, —P(O)(OR⁴⁶)(O⁻), —OP(O)(OR⁴⁶)(OR⁴⁷), —C(O)R⁴⁶, —C(S)R⁴⁶, —C(O)OR⁴⁶, —C(O)NR⁴⁶R⁴⁷, —C(O)O⁻, —C(S)R⁴⁶, —NR⁴⁸(O)NR⁴⁶R⁴⁷, —NR⁴⁸C(S)NR⁴⁶R⁴⁷, —NR⁴⁹C(NR⁴⁸)NR⁴⁶R⁴⁷ and —C(NR⁴⁸)NR⁴⁶R⁴⁷, where each X is independently a halogen; each R⁴⁶, R⁴⁷, R⁴⁸ and R⁴⁹ are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted alkyl, arylalkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, substituted heteroarylalkyl, —NR⁵⁰R⁵¹, —C(O)R⁵⁰ or —S(O)₂R⁵⁰ or optionally R⁵⁰ and R⁵¹ together with the atom to which they are both attached form a cycloheteroalkyl or substituted cycloheteroalkyl ring; and R⁵⁰ and R⁵¹ are independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted alkyl, arylalkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroalkyl, substituted heteroalkyl, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl or substituted heteroarylalkyl.

Examples of representative substituted aryls include the following

In these formulae one of R⁵² and R⁵³ may be hydrogen and at least one of R⁵² and R⁵³ is each independently selected from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloheteroalkyl, alkanoyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, NR⁵⁴COR⁵⁵, NR⁵⁴SOR⁵⁵, NR⁵⁴SO₂R⁵⁷, COOalkyl, COOaryl, CONR⁵⁴R⁵⁵, CONR⁵⁴OR⁵⁵, NR⁵⁴R⁵⁵, SO₂NR⁵⁴R⁵⁵, S-alkyl, S-alkyl, SOalkyl, SO₂alkyl, Saryl, SOaryl, SO₂aryl; or R⁵² and R⁵³ may be joined to form a cyclic ring (saturated or unsaturated) from 5 to 8 atoms, optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group N, O or S. R⁵⁴, R⁵⁵, and R⁵⁶ are independently hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, perfluoroalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, heteroaryl, substituted or hetero alkyl or the like.

“Hetero” when used to describe a compound or a group present on a compound means that one or more carbon atoms in the compound or group have been replaced by a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heteroatom. Hetero may be applied to any of the hydrocarbyl groups described above such as alkyl, e.g. heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, e.g. cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, e.g. heteroaryl, cycloalkenyl, cycloheteroalkenyl, and the like having from 1 to 5, and especially from 1 to 3 heteroatoms.

“Heteroaryl” refers to a monovalent heteroaromatic group derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single atom of a parent heteroaromatic ring system. Typical heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from acridine, arsindole, carbazole, β-carboline, chromane, chromene, cinnoline, furan, imidazole, indazole, indole, indoline, indolizine, isobenzofuran, isochromene, isoindole, isoindoline, isoquinoline, isothiazole, isoxazole, naphthyridine, oxadiazole, oxazole, perimidine, phenanthridine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phthalazine, pteridine, purine, pyran, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrrole, pyrrolizine, quinazoline, quinoline, quinolizine, quinoxaline, tetrazole, thiadiazole, thiazole, thiophene, triazole, xanthene, and the like. Preferably, the heteroaryl group is between 5-15 membered heteroaryl, with 5-10 membered heteroaryl being particularly preferred. Particular heteroaryl groups are those derived from thiophene, pyrrole, benzothiophene, benzofuran, indole, pyridine, quinoline, imidazole, oxazole and pyrazine.

Examples of representative heteroaryls include the following:

wherein each Y is selected from carbonyl, N, NR⁵⁸, O, and S; and R⁵⁸ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl or the like.

As used herein, the term “cycloheteroalkyl” refers to a stable heterocyclic non-aromatic ring and fused rings containing one or more heteroatoms independently selected from N, O and S. A fused heterocyclic ring system may include carbocyclic rings and need only include one heterocyclic ring. Examples of heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, piperidinyl and morpholinyl, and are shown in the following illustrative examples:

wherein each X is selected from CR⁵⁸ ₂, NR⁵⁸, O and S; and each Y is selected from NR⁵⁸, O and S; and R⁵⁸ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl or the like. These cycloheteroalkyl rings may be optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl-S(O)—, aryl-S(O)—, alkyl-S(O)₂— and aryl-S(O)₂—. Substituting groups include carbonyl or thiocarbonyl which provide, for example, lactam and urea derivatives.

Examples of representative cycloheteroalkenyls include the following:

wherein each X is selected from CR⁵⁸ ₂, NR⁵⁸, O and S; and each Y is selected from carbonyl, N, NR⁵⁸, O and S; and R⁵⁸ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl or the like.

Examples of representative aryl having hetero atoms containing substitution include the following:

wherein each X is selected from C—R⁵⁸ ₂, NR⁵⁸, O and S; and each Y is selected from carbonyl, NR⁵⁸, O and S; and R⁵⁸ is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heteroalkyl or the like.

One having ordinary skill in the art of organic synthesis will recognize that the maximum number of heteroatoms in a stable, chemically feasible heterocyclic ring, whether it is aromatic or non aromatic, is determined by the size of the ring, the degree of unsaturation and the valence of the heteroatoms. In general, a heterocyclic ring may have one to four heteroatoms so long as the heteroaromatic ring is chemically feasible and stable.

“Pharmaceutically acceptable” means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopoeia or other generally recognized pharmacopoeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans.

“Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to the non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts, and base addition salts, of compounds of the present invention, in particular they are pharmaceutically acceptable and possess the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound. These salts can be prepared in situ during the final isolation and purification of compounds useful in the present invention. Such salts include: (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]-oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid, 3-phenylpropionic acid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuric acid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, muconic acid, and the like; or (2) salts formed when an acidic proton present in the parent compound either is replaced by a metal ion, e.g., an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion, or an aluminum ion; or coordinates with an organic base such as ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, N-methylglucamine and the like. Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable cation” refers to a non toxic, acceptable cationic counter-ion of an acidic functional group. Such cations are exemplified by sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium cations, and the like.

“Pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle” refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient or carrier with which a compound of the invention is administered.

“Preventing” or “prevention” refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a subject that may be exposed to or predisposed to the disease but does not yet experience or display symptoms of the disease).

“Prodrugs” refers to compounds, including derivatives of the compounds of the invention, which have cleavable groups and become by solvolysis or under physiological conditions the compounds of the invention which are pharmaceutically active in vivo. Such examples include, but are not limited to, choline ester derivatives and the like, N-alkylmorpholine esters and the like.

“Subject” includes humans. The terms “human,” “patient” and “subject” are used interchangeably herein.

“Treating” or “treatment” of any disease or disorder refers, in one embodiment, to ameliorating the disease or disorder (i.e., arresting or reducing the development of the disease or at least one of the clinical symptoms thereof). In another embodiment “treating” or “treatment” refers to ameliorating at least one physical parameter, which may not be discernible by the subject. In yet another embodiment, “treating” or “treatment” refers to modulating the disease or disorder, either physically, (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom), physiologically, (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter), or both. In yet another embodiment, “treating” or “treatment” refers to delaying the onset of the disease or disorder.

Other derivatives of the compounds of this invention have activity in both their acid and acid derivative forms, but in the acid sensitive form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in the mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985). Prodrugs include acid derivatives well know to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acid with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a substituted or unsubstituted amine, or acid anhydrides, or mixed anhydrides. Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters, amides and anhydrides derived from acidic groups pendant on the compounds of this invention are preferred prodrugs. In some cases it is desirable to prepare double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy)alkyl esters or ((alkoxycarbonyl)oxy)alkylesters. Preferred are the C₁ to C₈ alkyl, C₂-C₈ alkenyl, aryl, C₇-C₁₂ substituted aryl, and C₇-C₁₂ arylalkyl esters of the compounds of the invention.

As used herein, the term “isotopic variant” refers to a compound that contains unnatural proportions of isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compound. For example, an “isotopic variant” of a compound can contain one or more non-radioactive isotopes, such as for example, deuterium (²H or D), carbon-13 (¹³C), nitrogen-15 (¹⁵N), or the like. It will be understood that, in a compound where such isotopic substitution is made, the following atoms, where present, may vary, so that for example, any hydrogen may be ²H/D, any carbon may be ¹³C, or any nitrogen may be ¹⁵N, and that the presence and placement of such atoms may be determined within the skill of the art. Likewise, the invention may include the preparation of isotopic variants with radioisotopes, in the instance for example, where the resulting compounds may be used for drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies. The radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e. ³H, and carbon-14, i.e. ¹⁴C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection. Further, compounds may be prepared that are substituted with positron emitting isotopes, such as ¹¹C, ¹⁸F, ¹⁵O and ¹³N, and would be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy.

All isotopic variants of the compounds provided herein, radioactive or not, are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the invention.

It is also to be understood that compounds that have the same molecular formula but differ in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “isomers”. Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed “stereoisomers”.

Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed “diastereomers” and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed “enantiomers”. When a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible. An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or (−)-isomers respectively). A chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a “racemic mixture”.

“Tautomers” refer to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a particular compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of π electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, enols and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Another example of tautomerism is the aci- and nitro-forms of phenylnitromethane, that are likewise formed by treatment with acid or base.

Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.

The compounds of this invention may possess one or more asymmetric centers; such compounds can therefore be produced as individual (R)- or (S)-stereoisomers or as mixtures thereof. Unless indicated otherwise, the description or naming of a particular compound in the specification and claims is intended to include both individual enantiomers and mixtures, racemic or otherwise, thereof. The methods for the determination of stereochemistry and the separation of stereoisomers are well-known in the art.

The Compounds

The present invention is based on the discovery of that MAPKAPK5 functions in the pathway that results in the expression of MMP1, and that inhibitors of MAPKAPK5 activity, such as the compounds of the present invention, are useful for the treatment of diseases involving the abnormally high expression of MMP activity.

The present matrix metallo proteinase inhibiting compounds of the present invention may be described generally as [1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine-8-yl-amines substituted in the 5-position by an aryl and heteroaryl group, and an in the 8-position by an arylamino or a heteroarylamino group.

More particularly, the present invention relates to compounds having matrix metallo proteinase inhibiting properties in a mammalian cell, according to formula (I):

wherein:

-   A and B are independently CR2R″, NR″, oxygen or sulphur; -   AA is CR2 or N; -   D is C═O, CR2R″ or NR″; -   E is NH or CR″R6, when k is zero, and is NH or CR″R6a, when k is     one; -   F is sulphur, oxygen or NH; -   T is oxygen or NR; -   U, V, W and X are independently CR″R7 or NR″; -   Y is CR″ or N; -   Z is hydrogen, amino, hydroxyl, lower alkoxy, carbamoyl, carboxyl,     SO₂Rz, SO₂NRRz, —NR(CO)(CH2)d-Rz, —NRRz, —(CO)—ORz,     —(CO)—NR(CH2)d-Rz, or

-   R is independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; -   R″ is H or forms a double bond with an adjacent atom; -   R1 is H; R2; or lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl and lower alkyl-lower     cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with one or more R2; -   R3 is H or forms a double bond with an adjacent R″; -   R2 is H, F, Cl; CN; COOR4; OR4; C(O)N(R4R5); S(O)₂N(R4R5); lower     alkyl; O-lower alkyl; NH-lower alkyl; S-lower alkyl; COO-lower     alkyl; OC(O)-lower alkyl; C(O)N(R4)-lower alkyl; S(O)₂N(R4)-lower     alkyl; S(O)N(R4)-lower alkyl; S(O)₂-lower alkyl; S(O)-lower alkyl;     N(R4)S(O)₂-lower alkyl; and N(R4)S(O)-lower alkyl; wherein each     lower alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more of F and Cl; -   R4 and R5 are independently     -   H; F, Cl; or lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl, or lower alkyl-lower         cycloalkyl optionally substituted with one or more of F and Cl; -   R6 is hydrogen, amino, hydroxyl, carbamoyl, carboxyl, SO₂R, NRR′,     —(CO)—OR, or —(CO)—NRR′; -   R6a is R6, Cl, F, lower alkoxy, cyano, trifluoromethoxy; or together     with the adjacent be —(CHR″)_(n)—NR—(CHR″)_(p)—, and form a five or     six member heterocyclic ring fused to the ring to which they are     bonded; -   R7 is independently hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl or lower alkoxy; -   Rz is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkanoyl, phenyl, 1-loweralkyl     pyrrolidin-3-yl, pyrazol-4-yl, pyrazol-2-yl, or lower alkyl, lower     alkanoyl, phenyl, 1-loweralkyl pyrrolidin-3-yl, pyrazol-4-yl,     pyrazol-2-yl or pyrid-3-yl substituted by one or more of hydroxyl,     amino, mono- or di-loweralkylamino, acetamidyl, lower alkanoyl,     lower alkyl, 4-hydroxy-phenyl, 3-aminomethylphenyl, lower alkyl     sulfonyl, 4-diloweralkylaminophenyl, pyrid-3-yl, 1H-indol-3-yl,     morpholin-4-yl; -   R and Rz together may be —(CHR)_(q)-T-(CHR)_(r)— and form a five or     six member heterocyclic ring with the nitrogen to which they are     bonded; -   Rz and R7 together may be —(CHR″)_(n)—NR—(CHR″)_(p)—, and form a     five or six member heterocyclic ring fused to the ring to which they     are bonded; -   b and d are independently 0 or 1; provided at least one of b or d is     1; -   k is 0 or 1; -   m is 0 or 1; -   n and p are independently 0, 1 or 2; -   q and r are 1 or 2; -   x is o or 1;     -   with the provisos that at least one of R7 or Rz is other than         hydrogen;         or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or         prodrug thereof.

A preferred aspect of the present invention is a subclass of compounds according to formula II,

wherein

-   A and B are independently CR2R″, NR″, oxygen or sulphur; -   AA is CR2 or N; -   D is C═O, CR2R″ or NR″; -   E is NH or CR″R6, when k is zero, and is NH or CR″R6a, when k is     one; -   F is sulphur, oxygen or NH; -   T is oxygen or NR; -   R″ is H or forms a double bond with an adjacent atom; -   R is independently hydrogen or lower alkyl; -   R1 is H; R2; or lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl and lower alkyl-lower     cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with one or more R2; -   R2 is H, F, Cl; CN; COOR4; OR4; C(O)N(R4R5); S(O)₂N(R4R5); lower     alkyl; O-lower alkyl; NH-lower alkyl; S-lower alkyl; COO-lower     alkyl; OC(O)-lower alkyl; C(O)N(R4)-lower alkyl; S(O)₂N(R4)-lower     alkyl; S(O)N(R4)-lower alkyl; S(O)₂-lower alkyl; S(O)-lower alkyl;     N(R4)S(O)₂-lower alkyl; and N(R4)S(O)-lower alkyl; wherein each     lower alkyl is optionally substituted with one or more of F and Cl; -   R4 and R5 are independently     -   H; F, Cl; or lower alkyl, lower cycloalkyl, or lower alkyl-lower         cycloalkyl optionally substituted with one or more of F and Cl; -   R6 is hydrogen, amino, hydroxyl, carbamoyl, carboxyl, SO₂R, NRR′,     —(CO)—OR, or —(CO)—NRR′; -   R6a is R6, Cl, F, lower alkoxy, cyano, trifluoromethoxy; or together     with the adjacent be —(CHR″)_(n)—NR—(CHR″)_(p)—, and form a five or     six member heterocyclic ring fused to the ring to which they are     bonded; -   R8 is phenyl independently substituted by R_(a) in the     ortho-position, by R_(b) in the meta-position, and by R_(c) in the     para-position; pyrid-3-yl; pyrid-3-yl substituted by R_(c) in the     5-position; or cyclohexyl independently substituted by R_(a) in the     2-position, and by R_(d) in the 4-position;     -   R_(a) is hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl, trifluoromethyl or         lower alkoxy;     -   R_(b) is hydrogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkyl         sulfonamide, carboxyl, —NR_(e)R_(f), —(CO)—OR, or         —(CO)—NR_(e)R_(f);     -   R_(c) is hydrogen, amino, hydroxyl, lower alkoxy, carbamoyl,         carboxyl, SO₂R, SO₂NR_(e)R_(f), NR_(e)R_(f), —(CO)—OR, or         —(CO)—NR_(e)R_(f); or     -   R_(b) and R_(c) can together form a benzdiazole, or indole         substituted in the 3-position by R′;     -   R_(d) is hydroxyl, halogen, amino, lower alkoxy, or NR_(e)R_(f);     -   R_(e) and R_(f) are independently hydrogen, 1-loweralkyl         pyrrolidin-3-yl, 1-R-pyrazol-4-yl, lower alkanoyl, phenyl, or         lower alkyl optionally substituted by one or more of         4-hydroxy-phenyl, 3-aminomethylphenyl, lower alkyl sulfonyl,         4-diloweralkylaminophenyl, pyrid-3-yl, 1H-indol-3-yl,         morpholin-4-yl, hydroxyl, amino, mono- or di-loweralkylamino, or         by lower alkanoyl; or R′ and R″ together are         —(CHR)_(n)-T-(CHR)_(n)— and form a five or six member         heterocyclic ring with the nitrogen to which they are bonded; -   m is 0, 1, or 2; -   n is 1 or 2; -   with the proviso that at least one of R_(a), R_(b) and R_(c) is     other than hydrogen; -   or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate or prodrug     thereof.

A particularly preferred embodiment of the present invention relates to compounds according to formula III:

wherein R¹ is H, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl; and each of R⁸ and R⁹ is independently selected from substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof; and stereoisomers, isotopic variants and tautomers thereof.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl, substituted or unsubstituted pyrimidine, and substituted or unsubstituted pyrazine, substituted or unsubstituted pyrrole, substituted or unsubstituted pyrazole and substituted or unsubstituted imidazole.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R¹ is H, Me, Et, i-Pr or CF₃.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R¹ is H.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted cyclohexyl or cyclopentyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl.

In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted piperidinyl, morpholinyl, or pyrrolidinyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, pyridyl or pyrimidine.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is selected from substituted phenyl, substituted pyridyl, and substituted pyrimidine; and the substitution is

-   -   -L-R^(8d); and wherein     -   L is selected from a bond, alkylene, heteroalkylene, —O—,         —N(R^(8e))—, —CO—, —CO₂—, —SO—, —SO₂—, —CON(R^(8e))—,         —SO₂N(R^(8e))—, —N(R^(8e))CO—, —N(R^(8e))SO₂—, —N(R^(8e))CO         N(R^(8e))—, —N(R^(8e))SO₂N(R^(8e))—; and     -   R^(8d) is selected from substituted or unsubstituted alkyl,         substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or         unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted         heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl,         substituted or unsubstituted amino, substituted or unsubstituted         aralkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroarylalkyl and         substituted or unsubstituted aminoalkyl; and     -   R^(8e) is selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl         and substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is

-   -   wherein L, and R^(8d) are as described in the preceding         paragraph; the subscript n is selected from 1-4; and each R^(8a)         is independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or         unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, and halo.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and the subscript n is 1 and R^(8a) is Me, Et, Pr, iso-Pr, Cl, F, CN, OMe, or CF₃. In another embodiment, R^(8a) is at 2-(ortho to -L) position. In yet another embodiment, R^(8a) is 2-Cl, 2-F, 2-Me or 2-CF₃.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and

-   -   L is a bond, —O—, —CO—, —CON(R^(8e))—, or —N(R^(8e))CO—;     -   R^(8d) is selected from substituted or unsubstituted alkyl,         substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or         unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted         heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl,         substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl, substituted or         unsubstituted heteroarylalkyl and substituted or unsubstituted         aminoalkyl; and     -   R^(8e) is selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and

-   -   L is a bond, —O—, —CO—, —CON(R^(8e))—, or —N(R^(8e))CO—; and     -   R^(8d) is selected from H, alkylaminoethyl, dialkylaminoethyl,         cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, arylalkyl, and heteroarylalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and

-   -   L is a bond, —O—, —CO—, —CON(R^(8e))—, or —N(R^(8e))CO—; and     -   R^(8d) is selected from methylaminoethyl, ethylaminoethyl,         dimethylaminoethyl, diethylaminoethyl, substituted or         unsubstituted pyrrolidinyl, benzyl and pyridylmethyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and

-   -   L is a bond, —CO—, SO₂, —(CH₂)_(m1)—, —O(CH₂)_(m1)—,         —NH(CH₂)_(m1)—, —CON(H)(CH₂)_(m1)—, or —SO₂NH(CH₂)_(m1)—; the         subscript m1 is selected from 1-4; and R^(8d) is

-   -   and wherein the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted         heterocycloalkyl. In another embodiment, L is a bond, —CO—,         —O(CH₂)_(m1)—, —CON(H)(CH₂)_(m1)—, or —NHCO—;

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above; L is a bond; and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above; L is a bond; and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, substituted or unsubstituted piperazine, and substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, morpholine.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above; L is CO; and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above; L is CO; and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, substituted or unsubstituted piperazine, and substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, morpholine.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above; L is —(CH₂)_(m1)—, —O(CH₂)_(m1)—, or —NH(CH₂)_(m1)—; the subscript m1 is selected from 1-4; and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above; L is —(CH₂)—O(CH₂)_(m1)—, or —NH(CH₂)_(m1)—; the subscript m1 is 2 or 3; and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, substituted or unsubstituted piperazine, and substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, morpholine.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above; L is —CON(H)(CH₂)_(m1)—, or —NHCO(CH₂)_(m1)—; the subscript m1 is selected from 1-4; and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above; L is —CON(H)(CH₂)_(m1)—; the subscript m1 is 2 or 3; and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, substituted or unsubstituted piperazine, and substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, morpholine.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula IVa, IVb, IVc, or IVd:

and wherein L and the ring P are as described above; the subscript n, is selected from 1-4; each R^(8a) is independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, and halo; and R⁹ is independently selected from substituted or unsubstituted aryl and heteroaryl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or prodrug thereof; and stereoisomers, isotopic variants and tautomers thereof.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, L is a bond.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, L is methylene, ethylene, propylene, and butylene.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, L is —CO—.

A compound according to claim 9, wherein L is —CO—.

A compound according to claim 9, wherein L is —NHCO— or —CONH—.

A compound according to claim 9, wherein L is —CON(H)—CH₂—CH₂—, or —N(H)—CO—CH₂—CH₂—.

A compound according to claim 9, wherein L is —OCH₂—CH₂— or —NHCH₂—CH₂—.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, L is —SO₂—.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, L is —CON(H)—CH₂—CH₂—, or —SO₂NH—CH₂—CH₂—.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, L is —OCH₂—CH₂— or —NHCH₂—CH₂—

In a preferred embodiment L is a bond.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, morpholine or piperazine.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, L and the ring P are as described above; the subscript n is 4 and each R^(8s) is H.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, L and the ring P are as described above; the subscript n is 1 and R^(8a) is Me, Et, Pr, iso-Pr, Cl, F, CN, OMe, or CF₃. In another embodiment, R^(8a) is at 2-(ortho to -L) position. In yet another embodiment, R^(8a) is 2-Cl, 2-F, 2-Me or 2-CF₃.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is

and wherein the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl; the subscript n is selected from 1-4 and each R^(8a) is independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, and halo.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, morpholine or piperazine.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and the subscript n is 4 and each R^(8a) is H.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and the subscript n is 1 and R^(8a) is Me, Et, Pr, iso-Pr, Cl, F, CN, OMe, or CF₃. In another embodiment, R^(8a) is at the 2-(ortho to N-ring P) position. In yet another embodiment, R^(8a) is 2-Cl, 2-F, 2-Me or 2-CF₃.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is

and wherein the subscript n is selected from 1-4; each R^(8a) is independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, and halo; R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; R^(8c) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl and the subscript x is selected from 1-8.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is

-   -   and wherein the subscript n is selected from 1-4; each R^(8a) is         independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or         unsubstituted alkyl alkoxy, cyano, and halo; R^(8b) is hydrogen,         substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or         unsubstituted cycloalkyl; R^(8c) is hydrogen or Me.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is

-   -   and wherein the subscript n is selected from 1-4; each R^(8a) is         independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or         unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, and halo.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is

-   -   and wherein the subscript n is selected from 1-4; each R^(8a) is         independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or         unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, and halo; and R^(8b) is         hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or         unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and the subscript n is 4 and each R^(8a) is H.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and the subscript n is 1 and R^(8a) is Me, Et, Pr, iso-Pr, Cl, F, CN, OMe, or CF₃. In another embodiment, R^(8a) is at 2-(ortho to N-ringP) position. In yet another embodiment, R^(8a) is 2-Cl, 2-F, 2-Me or 2-CF₃.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and R^(8b) is H.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CH₂CF₃, CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, cyclopropyl or cyclopropylmethyl.

In one particular embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, R⁸ is as described above and R^(8b) is i-Pr.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, R^(8a) is independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, carbamoyl, CHO, and halo. In one embodiment, R^(8a) is H, Me, F, or Cl. In a preferred embodiment R^(8a) is H.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IVa-IVd, the compound is according to formula Va, Vb, Vc, Vd, Ve, or Vf:

and wherein R⁹ is as described for formula III and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Va-Vf, R^(8b) is H.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Va-Vf, R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Va-Vf, R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Va-Vf, R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CH₂CF₃, CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, cyclopropyl or cyclopropylmethyl.

In one particular embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Va-Vf, R^(8b) is i-Pr.

In a one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-VF, R⁹ is substituted or unsubstituted aryl. In another embodiment, R⁹ is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.

In a one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-VF, R⁹ is substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. In another embodiment, R⁹ is substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl.

In a one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-VF, R⁹ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, indolyl, isoinolyl, pyrrolyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, and thiazolyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-VF, R⁹ is

and each of A¹, A² and A³ is independently selected from S, O, N, NR^(9a), and CR^(9a); each of R^(9a) is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl; and R^(9b) is CONH₂, CONHMe, or CN.

In further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-VF, R⁹ is

In further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-VF, R⁹ is

In further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-Vf, R⁹ is

and wherein the subscript m is selected from 1-4 and each R^(9d) is independently H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or halo.

In further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-Vf, R⁹ is

and wherein the subscript m is selected from 1-4 and each R^(9d) is independently H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or halo.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-Vf, R⁹ is

and wherein the subscript m is selected from 1-3 and each R^(9d) is independently H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or halo.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-Vf, R⁹ is as described above; and each R^(9d) is H.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae III-VF, R⁹ is as described above; m is 1 or 2 and each R^(9d) is independently Me, Cl or F.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula VIa, VIb, VIc, VId, VIe or VIf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIa-VIf, R^(8b) is H.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIa-VIf, R^(8b) is cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIa-VIf, R^(8b) is cyclopropyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIa-VIf, R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIa-VIf, R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CF₃, CH₂CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, or cyclopropylmethyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula VIIa, VIIb, VIIc, VIIc, VIId, VIIe or VIIf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIId, R^(8b) is H.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIIf, R^(8b) is cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIIf, R^(8b) is cyclopropyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIIf, R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIa-VIIf, R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CF₃, CH₂CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, or cyclopropylmethyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula VIIIa, VIIIb, VIIIc, VIIId, VIIIe or VIIIf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIIa-VIIIf, R^(8b) is H.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIIa-VIIIf, R^(8b) is cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIIa-VIIIf, R^(8b) is cyclopropyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIIa-VIIIf, R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae VIIIa-VIIIf, R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CF₃, CH₂CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, or cyclopropylmethyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula IXa, IXb, IXc, IXd, IXe, or IXf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IXa-IXf, R^(8b) is H.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IXa-IXf, R^(8b) is cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IXa-IXf, R^(8b) is cyclopropyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IXa-IXf, R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae IXa-IXf, R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CF₃, CH₂CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, or cyclopropylmethyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula Xa, Xb, Xc, Xd, Xe, or Xf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Xa-Xf, R^(8b) is H.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Xa-Xf, R^(8b) is cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Xa-Xf, R^(8b) is cyclopropyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Xa-Xf, R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae Xa-Xf, R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CF₃, CH₂CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, or cyclopropylmethyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula XIa, XIb, XIc, XId, XIe or XIf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; and R^(9e) is hydrogen Me, or CN.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIa-XIf, R^(9e) is H.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIa-XIf, R^(9e) is Me.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIa-XIf, R^(9e) is CN.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIa-XIf, R^(8b) is H.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIa-XIf, R^(8b) is cycloalkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIa-XIf, R^(8b) is cyclopropyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIa-XIf, R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.

In a further embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XIa-XIf, R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CF₃, CH₂CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, or cyclopropylmethyl.

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula XIIa, XIIb, XIIc or XIId:

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula XIIIa, XIIIb, XIIIc or XIIId:

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula XIVa, XIVb, XIVc or XIVd:

In one embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is according to formula XVa, XVb, or XIVc:

and L is a bond or —O—CH₂—CH₂—; the ring P is

and R^(8b) is H, Me, i-Pr, t-Bu, CH₂CONH₂, cyclopropylmethyl, or CH₂CF₃.

In one particular embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XVa-XVc, L is a bond. In another particular embodiment, L is —O—CH₂—CH₂

In one particular embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XVa-XVc, the ring P is

In more particular embodiment, with respect to compounds of formulae XVa-XVc, the ring P is

In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is selected from Table 1.

In another embodiment, with respect to compounds of formula III, the compound is selected from Table 2.

In certain aspects, the present invention provides prodrugs and derivatives of the compounds according to the formulae above. Prodrugs are derivatives of the compounds of the invention, which have metabolically cleavable groups and become by solvolysis or under physiological conditions the compounds of the invention, which are pharmaceutically active, in vivo. A prodrug may be inactive when administered to a subject but is converted in vivo to an active compound of the invention. “Pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs” as used herein refers to those prodrugs of the compounds useful in the present invention, which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of patients with undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use of the compounds of the invention. The term “prodrug” means a compound that is transformed in vivo to yield an effective compound useful in the present invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate or solvate thereof. The transformation may occur by various mechanisms, such as through hydrolysis in blood. The compounds bearing metabolically cleavable groups have the advantage that they may exhibit improved bioavailability as a result of enhanced solubility and/or rate of absorption conferred upon the parent compound by virtue of the presence of the metabolically cleavable group, thus, such compounds act as pro-drugs. A thorough discussion is provided in Design of Prodrugs, H. Bundgaard, ed., Elsevier (1985); Methods in Enzymology; K. Widder et al, Ed., Academic Press, 42, 309-396 (1985); A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bandaged, ed., Chapter 5; “Design and Applications of Prodrugs” 113-191 (1991); Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews, H. Bundgard, 8, 1-38, (1992); J. Pharm. Sci., 77,285 (1988); Chem. Pharm. Bull., N. Nakeya et al, 32, 692 (1984); Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, T. Higuchi and V. Stella, 14 A.C.S. Symposium Series, and Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, E. B. Roche, ed., American Pharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, which are incorporated herein by reference. Such examples include, but are not limited to, choline ester derivatives and the like, N-alkylmorpholine esters and the like.

Other derivatives of the compounds of this invention have activity in both their acid and acid derivative forms, but the acid sensitive form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in the mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985). Prodrugs include acid derivatives well know to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acid with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a substituted or unsubstituted amine, or acid anhydrides, or mixed anhydrides. Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters, amides and anhydrides derived from acidic groups pendant on the compounds of this invention are preferred prodrugs. In some cases it is desirable to prepare double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy)alkyl esters or ((alkoxycarbonyl)oxy)alkylesters. Preferred are the C₁ to C₈ alkyl, C₂-C₈ alkenyl, aryl, C₇-C₁₂ substituted aryl, and C₇-C₁₂ arylalkyl esters of the compounds of the invention.

Pharmaceutical Compositions

When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of this invention are typically administered in the form of a pharmaceutical composition. Such compositions can be prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.

Generally, the compounds of this invention are administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. The amount of the compound actually administered will typically be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound-administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.

The pharmaceutical compositions of this invention can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. Depending on the intended route of delivery, the compounds of this invention are preferably formulated as either injectable or oral compositions or as salves, as lotions or as patches all for transdermal administration.

The compositions for oral administration can take the form of bulk liquid solutions or suspensions, or bulk powders. More commonly, however, the compositions are presented in unit dosage forms to facilitate accurate dosing. The term “unit dosage forms” refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Typical unit dosage forms include prefilled, premeasured ampules or syringes of the liquid compositions or pills, tablets, capsules or the like in the case of solid compositions. In such compositions, the furansulfonic acid compound is usually a minor component (from about 0.1 to about 50% by weight or preferably from about 1 to about 40% by weight) with the remainder being various vehicles or carriers and processing aids helpful for forming the desired dosing form.

Liquid forms suitable for oral administration may include a suitable aqueous or nonaqueous vehicle with buffers, suspending and dispensing agents, colorants, flavors and the like. Solid forms may include, for example, any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.

Injectable compositions are typically based upon injectable sterile saline or phosphate-buffered saline or other injectable carriers known in the art. As before, the active compound in such compositions is typically a minor component, often being from about 0.05 to 10% by weight with the remainder being the injectable carrier and the like.

Transdermal compositions are typically formulated as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s), generally in an amount ranging from about 0.01 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 10% by weight, and more preferably from about 0.5 to about 15% by weight. When formulated as a ointment, the active ingredients will typically be combined with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients may be formulated in a cream with, for example an oil-in-water cream base. Such transdermal formulations are well-known in the art and generally include additional ingredients to enhance the dermal penetration of stability of the active ingredients or the formulation. All such known transdermal formulations and ingredients are included within the scope of this invention.

The compounds of this invention can also be administered by a transdermal device. Accordingly, transdermal administration can be accomplished using a patch either of the reservoir or porous membrane type, or of a solid matrix variety.

The above-described components for orally administrable, injectable or topically administrable compositions are merely representative. Other materials as well as processing techniques and the like are set forth in Part 8 of Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition, 1985, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., which is incorporated herein by reference.

The compounds of this invention can also be administered in sustained release forms or from sustained release drug delivery systems. A description of representative sustained release materials can be found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences.

The following formulation examples illustrate representative pharmaceutical compositions of this invention. The present invention, however, is not limited to the following pharmaceutical compositions.

Formulation 1—Tablets

A compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a dry gelatin binder in an approximate 1:2 weight ratio. A minor amount of magnesium stearate is added as a lubricant. The mixture is formed into 240-270 mg tablets (80-90 mg of active amide compound per tablet) in a tablet press.

Formulation 2—Capsules

A compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a starch diluent in an approximate 1:1 weight ratio. The mixture is filled into 250 mg capsules (125 mg of active amide compound per capsule).

Formulation 3—Liquid

A compound of the invention (125 mg), sucrose (1.75 g) and xanthan gum (4 mg) are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11:89, 50 mg) in water. Sodium benzoate (10 mg), flavor, and color are diluted with water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce a total volume of 5 mL.

Formulation 4—Tablets

A compound of the invention is admixed as a dry powder with a dry gelatin binder in an approximate 1:2 weight ratio. A minor amount of magnesium stearate is added as a lubricant. The mixture is formed into 450-900 mg tablets (150-300 mg of active amide compound) in a tablet press.

Formulation 5—Injection

A compound of the invention is dissolved or suspended in a buffered sterile saline injectable aqueous medium to a concentration of approximately 5 mg/ml.

Formulation 6—Topical

Stearyl alcohol (250 g) and a white petrolatum (250 g) are melted at about 75° C. and then a mixture of a compound of the invention (50 g) methylparaben (0.25 g), propylparaben (0.15 g), sodium lauryl sulfate (10 g), and propylene glycol (120 g) dissolved in water (about 370 g) is added and the resulting mixture is stirred until it congeals.

Methods of Treatment

The present compounds are used as therapeutic agents for the treatment of conditions in mammals that are causally related or attributable to aberrant activity of MMP1 and/or MAPKAPK5. Accordingly, the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of this invention find use as therapeutics for preventing and/or treating inflammatory diseases in mammals including humans.

In a method of treatment aspect, this invention provides a method of treating a mammal susceptible to or afflicted with a condition associated with extra-cellular matrix (ECM) degradation, in particular arthritis, and more particularly, rheumatoid arthritis, which method comprises administering an effective amount of one or more of the compounds of the invention or a pharmaceutical composition just described.

In another method of treatment aspect, the invention provides a method of treating a mammal susceptible to or afflicted with a condition associated with an abnormal cellular expression of MMP1, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutical composition thereof.

In another method of treatment aspect, the present invention provides a method of treatment or prophylaxis of a condition characterized by abnormal matrix metallo proteinase activity, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective matrix metallo proteinase inhibiting amount of one or more of the compounds of the invention, or pharmaceutical composition thereof.

In yet another method of treatment aspect, this invention provides methods of treating a mammal susceptible to or afflicted with diseases and disorders which are mediated by or result in inflammation such as, for example rheumatoid arthritis and osteoarthritis, myocardial infarction, various autoimmune diseases and disorders, uveitis and atherosclerosis; itch/pruritus such as, for example psoriasis; and renal disorders method comprises administering an effective condition-treating or condition-preventing amount of one or more of the pharmaceutical compositions just described.

This invention also relates to the use of the present compounds in the manufacture of a medicament for treatment or prophylaxis of a condition prevented, ameliorated or eliminated by administration of an inhibitor of Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase-Activated Protein Kinase 5, or a condition characterised by abnormal collagenase activity, or a condition associated with ECM degradation or a condition selected from diseases involving inflammation, most preferably in for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.

As a further aspect of the invention there is provided the present compounds for use as a pharmaceutical especially in the treatment or prevention of the aforementioned conditions and diseases. Also provided herein is the use of the present compounds in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prevention of one of the aforementioned conditions and diseases.

A preferred regimen of the present method comprises the administration to a subject in suffering from a disease condition characterized by inflammatory, with an effective matrix metallo-protease inhibiting amount of a compound of the present invention for a period of time sufficient to reduce the abnormal levels of extracellular matrix degradation in the patient, and preferably terminate, the self-perpetuating processes responsible for said degradation. A special embodiment of the method comprises administering of an effective matrix metallo-protease inhibiting amount of a compound of the present invention to a subject patient suffering from or susceptible to the development of rheumatoid arthritis, for a period of time sufficient to reduce or prevent, respectively, collagen and bone degradation in the joints of said patient, and preferably terminate, the self-perpetuating processes responsible for said degradation.

Injection dose levels range from about 0.1 mg/kg/hour to at least 10 mg/kg/hour, all for from about 1 to about 120 hours and especially 24 to 96 hours. A preloading bolus of from about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg or more may also be administered to achieve adequate steady state levels. The maximum total dose is not expected to exceed about 2 g/day for a 40 to 80 kg human patient.

For the prevention and/or treatment of long-term conditions, such as inflammatory and autoimmune conditions, the regimen for treatment usually extends over many months or years, and accordingly oral dosing is preferred for patient convenience and tolerance. With oral dosing, one to five and especially two to four and typically three oral doses per day are representative regimens. Using these dosing patterns, each dose provides from about 0.01 to about 20 mg/kg of the compound of the invention, with preferred doses each providing from about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg and especially about 1 to about 5 mg/kg.

Transdermal doses are generally selected to provide similar or lower blood levels than are achieved using injection doses.

When used to prevent the onset of an inflammatory condition, the compounds of this invention will be administered to a patient at risk for developing the condition, typically on the advice and under the supervision of a physician, at the dosage levels described above. Patients at risk for developing a particular condition generally include those that have a family history of the condition, or those who have been identified by genetic testing or screening to be particularly susceptible to developing the condition.

The compounds of this invention can be administered as the sole active agent or they can be administered in combination with other agents, including other compounds that demonstrate the same or a similar therapeutic activity, and that are determined to safe and efficacious for such combined administration.

General Synthetic Procedures

The triazolo[1,5-a]pyridyl compounds of this invention can be prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. It will be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.

Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.

The following methods are presented with details as to the preparation of representative bicycloheteroaryls that have been listed hereinabove. The compounds of the invention may be prepared from known or commercially available starting materials and reagents by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis.

General

All reagents were of commercial grade and were used as received without further purification, unless otherwise stated. Commercially available anhydrous solvents were used for reactions conducted under inert atmosphere. Reagent grade solvents were used in all other cases, unless otherwise specified. Column chromatography was performed on silica gel 60 (35-70 μm). Thin layer chromatography was carried out using pre-coated silica gel F-254 plates (thickness 0.25 mm). ¹H NMR spectra were recorded on a Bruker DPX 400 NMR spectrometer (400 MHz). Chemical shifts (δ) for ¹H NMR spectra are reported in parts per million (ppm) relative to tetramethylsilane (δ 0.00) or the appropriate residual solvent peak, i.e. CHCl₃ (δ 7.27), as internal reference. Multiplicities are given as singlet (s), doublet (d), triplet (t), quartet (q), multiplet (m) and broad (br). Coupling constants (J) are given in Hz. Electrospray MS spectra were obtained on a Micromass platform LC/MS spectrometer. Column Used for all LCMS analysis: Waters Acquity HPLC BEH C18 1.7 μm, 2.1 mm ID×50 mm L (Part No. 186002350)). Preparative HPLC: Waters XBridge Prep C18 5 μm ODB 19 mm ID×100 mm L (Part No. 186002978). All the methods are using MeCN/H2O gradients. H2O contains either 0.1% TFA or 0.1% NH3.

Representative Synthesis of Compounds of Invention Compound 1: (4-Morpholin-4-ylphenyl)-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine Step 1: N′-(3,6-Dibromo-pyrazin-2-yl)-N,N-dimethylformamidine

A mixture of 3,6-dibromo-pyrazin-2-ylamine (15.37 g, 60.80 mmol) and N,N-dimethylformamide dimethyl acetal (10.1 mL, 76.00 mmol), suspended in ethanol (150 mL), is refluxed for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is evaporated in vacuo affording the title compound (18.6 g). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 3.20 (s, 3H), 3.21 (s, 3H), 7.93 (s, 1H), 8.48 (s, 1H). LCMS: Rt 3.81 min (99.1%), m/z (APCI) 307 (M+H)⁺.

Step 2: N-(3,6-Dibromo-pyrazin-2-yl)-N′-hydroxyformamidine

To a solution of N′-(3,6-dibromo-pyrazin-2-yl)-N,N-dimethylformamidine (18.6 g, 60.80 mmol) in methanol (200 mL) is added hydroxylamine hydrochloride (5.91 g, 85.12 mmol) in one portion. The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. The solvent is evaporated and the solid residue is treated with cold (ice cooling) water and collected by filtration. The precipitate is washed twice with water and petroleum ether and dried in vacuo yielding the title compound (17.45 g) as a white solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 7.82 (1H, br s), 8.21 (1H, s), 8.34 (1H, m), 11.17 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 3.17 min (98.7%), m/z (APCI) 295 (M+H)⁺.

Step 3: 5,8-Dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine

N-(3,6-dibromo-pyrazin-2-yl)-N′-hydroxyformamidine (17.4 mg, 58.80 mmol) is treated with polyphosphoric acid (150 g) for one hour at 50° C. and then for 1.75 hours at 70° C. After cooling to room temperature, water is added to the reaction mixture. The resultant suspension is brought to pH 8 by careful addition of solid NaHCO₃ in small portions. The precipitate formed is collected by filtration, washed once with 1N NaOH, three times with water and dried in vacuo. The residue is partitioned between ethyl acetate and 1N NaOH and the organic phase is washed one more time with 1N NaOH and once with brine. The organic phase is dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to give the title compound (10.15 g) as a white solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 8.43 (s, 1H), 8.92 (s, 1H). LCMS: Rt 2.73 min (94.2%), m/z (APCI) 277 (M+H)⁺.

Step 4: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-ylphenyl)amine

A mixture of 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (123 mg, 443 μmol), 4-(4-morpholino)aniline (118 mg. 0.664 mmol) and N-ethyldiisopropylamine (116 mL, 0.664 mmol) is heated at reflux in 2-propanol (3 mL) for 4.5 hours. The reaction mixture is evaporated to dryness and the residue partitioned between dichloromethane and citric acid (10%). The organic phase is washed once with water and brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to furnish the title compound (156 mg, 94%) as a yellow solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.11 (m, 4H), 3.78 (m, 4H), 6.97 (d, 2H), 7.82 (d, 2H), 7.87 (s, 1H), 8.71 (s, 1H), 9.93 (br s, 1H). LCMS, Rt 3.32 min (96.8%) m/z (APCI) 375 (M+H)⁺.

Step 5: (4-Morpholin-4-ylphenyl)-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

A suspension of (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-ylphenyl)amine (220 mg, 0.586 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetratmethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (171 mg, 0.879 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (68 mg, 59 μmol) and NaO^(t)Bu (225 mg, 2.34 mmol) in 4 mL of DMF/water (3:1) is degassed for 5 min in a sealed tube. The reaction mixture is heated in the sealed tube at 90° C. overnight. After evaporation of the solvents, the residue is collected by filtration, washed with water (3×) and ether (2×) and dried in vacuo. The crude product is purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 96:4 DCM/MeOH) yielding the title compound (76 mg, 36%) as a yellow solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.11 (4H, m), 3.79 (4H, m), 6.98 (2H, d), 7.90 (2H, d), 8.17 (1H, s), 8.35 (1H, br s), 8.64 (1H, br s), 8.75 (1H, s), 9.73 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.68 min (97.7%) m/z (APCI) 363 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 4: 4-(8-(4-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5a]pyrazin-5-yl)pyridin-2(1H)-one Step 1: [5-(2-Methoxy-pyridin-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-[4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine (80 mg, 0.206 mmol), 2-methoxypyridine-4-boronic acid (63 mg, 0.412 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (0.052 mmol) and 1.5N Na₂CO₃ (1.1 mL, 1.65 mmol) in 2:1 DMF/dioxane (2.2 mL). The crude product is purified by silica gel column chromatography using 96:4 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) and the fractions containing the desired product are combined and evaporated to afford the title compound (40 mg, 47%). HPLC (254 nm): Rt 2.26 min (65%).

Step 2: 4-(8-(4-(4-Methylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5a]pyrazin-5-yl)pyridin-2(1H)-one

A solution of [5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-[4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine (40 mg, 0.096 mmol) and pyridine hydrochloride (55 mg, 0.48 mmol) in water (1 mL) is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 96:4 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH). The title compound is isolated (23 mg, 60%).

11 mg (0.0273 mmol) of the free base compound are dissolved in the minimum amount of MeOH/DCM, (refluxed to dissolve) and 0.1M methanesulfonic acid (0.273 mL) in MeOH is added. After evaporation of the solvent the residue is triturated several times with a mixture of 1:1 ethyl acetate-diethyl ether and DCM-diethyl ether, filtered and dried in vacuo to afford the target compound as a mesylate salt (13 mg, 99%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.21 (3H, s), 2.91 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.00 (2H, t), 3.18-3.26 (2H, m), 3.58 (2H, d), 3.90 (2H, d), 6.83 (1H, s), 7.07 (2H, d), 7.25 (1H, s), 7.53 (1H, d), 7.93 (2H, d), 8.14 (1H, s), 8.76 (1H, s), 9.69 (1H, br s), 10.21 (1H, s), 13.3 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 1.71 min (97.5%), m/z (APCI) 403 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 6: 4-{8-[4-(4-Methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide Step 1: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine

A mixture of 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (2 g, 7.20 mmol), 4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamine (1.65 g, 8.64 mmol) and N-ethyldiisopropyl-amine (1.5 mL, 8.64 mmol) is heated at 80° C. in 2-propanol (50 mL) for 8 hours. The reaction mixture is evaporated to dryness and the residue partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with dichloromethane. The organic layers are washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to furnish the title compound (1.41 g) as a grey solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.27 (3H, s), 2.54 (4H, m), 3.14 (4H, m), 6.97 (2H, d), 7.80 (2H, d), 7.87 (1H, s), 8.72 (1H, s), 9.92 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.07 min (77.4%), m/z (APCI) 388 (M+H)⁺.

Step 2: 4-Bromo-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

A solution of 4 bromo-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid (2.0 g, 9.66 mmol), 1-ethyl-3-(3′-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrochloride (2.04 g, 10.63 mmol) and 1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate (1.44 g, 10.63 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is then cooled to 0° C. and aq. NE₃ (1 mL, 17.3 mmol) is added. The mixture is stirred at room temperature for an additional 5 hours, then water is added to the reaction mixture and the resultant precipitate is collected by filtration and washed with 1M NaOH, H₂O and petroleum ether. The title compound is isolated as a white solid (1.56 g, 78%).

Step 3: 4-(4,4,5,5-Tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

4-Bromo-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide (1.3 g, 6.34 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (3.22 g, 12.7 mmol), PdCl₂dppf (0.26 g, 0.318 mol) and KOAc (1.87 g, 19.10 mmol) are suspended in dioxane (20 mL), purged with nitrogen for 5 minutes and then heated at 90° C. overnight. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The aqueous layer is extracted three times with ethyl acetate and the combined organic phases are washed with brine, filtered through MgSO₄ and evaporated. The title product is crystallised from EtOAc-petroleum ether (2.135 g, 77% pure by LCMS).

Step 4: 4-{8-[4-(4-Methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

A suspension of 5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine (100 mg, 258 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxa-borolan-2-yl)-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide (130 mg, 516 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (74 mg, 64.5 mmol) in aqueous Na₂CO₃ (1.37 mL, 1.5 M, 2.06 mmol) and DMF/dioxane 2/1 (2.75 mL) is degassed for 5 min in a reaction tube. The tube is sealed and the reaction mixture is heated at 90° C. overnight. After cooling to room temperature the reaction mixture is partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The precipitate is collected by filtration and washed with water (1×) and ether (2×) and dried in vacuo. The crude product is purified by column chromatography (silica gel, DCM/MeOH/NH₃ 96:4) yielding the title compound (43 mg) as a yellow solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.26 (3H, s), 2.50 (4H, m), 3.15 (4H, m,), 6.99 (2H, d), 7.60 (1H, br s), 7.88 (2H, d), 8.10 (2H, m), 8.48 (1H, s), 8.66 (1H, s), 8.79 (1H, s), 9.97 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 1.99 min (97.6%), m/z (APCI) 435 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 9: 5-{8-[4-(4-Methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide Step 1: 5-Bromo-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

A solution of 5-bromo-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid (4.51 g, 21.78 mmol), 3-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate (3.24 g, 23.96 mmol), 1-ethyl-3-(3′-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide (4.6 g, 23.96 mmol) in DMF (70 mL) is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is then cooled to 0° C. and aq. 35% NH₃ (2.2 mL) is added. The mixture is stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue dissolved in EtOAc, washed with 1N NaHCO₃, and brine. The organic layers are combined, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to afford the title compound (3.78 g, 84%). HPLC (254 nm): Rt 2.46 min (96.5%).

Step 2: 5-(4,4,5,5-Tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

5-Bromo-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide (0.5 g, 2.426 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (678 mg, 2.669 mmol), PdCl₂dppf (59 mg, 0.072 mmol) and KOAc (0.714 g, 7.28 mmol) are suspended in dioxane (5 mL), purged with nitrogen for 5 minutes and then heated at 85° C. overnight. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The aqueous layer is extracted again with ethyl acetate and the combined organic phases are washed with brine, filtered through MgSO₄ and evaporated in vacuo to afford the title compound (417 mg, 68%).

Step 3: 5-{8-[4-(4-Methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using 5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine (100 mg, 0.258 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxa-borolan-2-yl)-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide (130 mg, 0.516 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (74 mg, 0.0645 mmol) in aqueous 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (1.37 mL, 2.06 mmol) and dioxane (2.75 mL). After evaporation of the solvent, the residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 96:6 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to afford the title compound (23 mg, 21%). LCMS: Rt 1.94 min (97.9%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.26 (3H, s), 2.49 (4H, m), 3.14 (4H, m), 6.98 (2H, d), 7.51 (1H, br s), 7.85-7.89 (2H, m), 8.03 (2H, d), 8.10 (1H, br s), 8.38 (1H, s), 8.82 (1H, s), 10.10 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 1.94 min, (97.9%), m/z (APCI) 435 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 12: 5-(5-Methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-N-(4-morpholinophenyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (0.2 g, 0.53 mmol), 5-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (222 mg, 1.06 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (0.154 mg, 0.134 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (aq) (2.84 mL, 4.26 mmol) and dioxane (8.5 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography using 98:2 and 97:3 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to give the title compound (15 mg, 7.5%). Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid in MeOH (0.398 mL) affords the title compound (15 mg) as a pale green solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.41 (3H, s, MsOH), 2.46 (3H, s), 3.20 (4H, m), 3.71 (4H, m), 7.11 (2H, d), 7.74 (1H, s), 7.97 (2H, d), 8.15 (1H, s), 8.69 (1H, s), 9.88 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.41 min (98.3%), m/z (APCI) 377 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 15: 4-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (0.2 g, 0.53 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide (0.27 mg, 1.06 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (0.15 mg, 0.133 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (aq) (2.84 mL, 4.26 mmol) and dioxane (10 mL). The reaction mixture is partitioned between water and ethyl acetate. A precipitate is formed, collected by filtration and purified by silica gel column chromatography using 95:5 DCM:MeOH to give the title compound (84.1 mg, 37.4%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.13 (4H, m), 3.79 (4H, m), 7.01 (2H, d), 7.60 (1H, br s), 7.91 (2H, d), 8.10 (2H, s), 8.48 (1H, s), 8.66 (1H, s), 8.79 (1H, s), 9.96 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.61 min (97.1%), m/z (APCI) 422 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 16: 5-(5-Methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-N-(4-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)phenyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine Step 1: 5-Methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 86, step 2 using 4-bromo-5-methyl-1H-pyrazole (3 g, 18.6 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (8.52 g, 33.5 mmol), PdCl₂dppf (913 mg, 1.118 mmol) and KOAc (5.49 mg, 55.9 mmol) in dimethylsulfoxide (30 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 7:3 followed by 1:1 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate to afford 5-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (3.87 g, 100%).

Step 2: 5-(5-Methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-N-(4-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)phenyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine (132 mg, 0.340 mmol), 5-methyl-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (141 mg, 0.68 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (98 mg, 0.085 mmol) and 1.5N Na₂CO₃ (1.81 mL, 2.72 mmol) in dioxane (5.4 mL). The crude product is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 95:5 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) followed by trituration with diethyl ether and petroleum ether to afford the title compound (9 mg, 7%) as a pale green solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.27 (3H, s), 2.38-2.49 (7H, m), 3.14 (4H, m), 6.97 (2H, d), 7.70 (1H, s), 7.88 (2H, d), 7.99 and 8.43 (1H, br s), 8.68 (1H, s), 9.71 (1H, s), 12.92 and 12.98 (1H, br s).

Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methane sulfonic acid (0.231 mL) yields the target compound (11 mg). LCMS: Rt 1.78 min (86%), m/z (APCI) 390 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 17: (3-Fluoro-4-morpholinophenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine Step 1: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(3-fluoro-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 1 using 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (0.5 g, 1.799 mmol), 3-fluoro-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenylamine (0.53 g, 2.70 mmol), and DIPEA (0.470 mL, 2.70 mmol) in 2-propanol (6 mL). The reaction mixture is partitioned between 10% citric acid aqueous solution and DCM. The organic phase is separated and washed with water and brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated under vacuum to afford the title compound (697 mg, 98%) which is used in the next step without further purification. LCMS: Rt 3.52 min (98.2%).

Step 2: N-(3-Fluoro-4-morpholinophenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(3-fluoro-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (100 mg, 0.254 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (99 mg, 0.51 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (73 mg, 0.063 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (1.36 mL, 2.03 mmol) and dioxane (4 mL). The crude material is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 98:2 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) and by trituration with diethyl ether and petroleum ether to yield the target compound (43 mg, 44%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.01 (4H, m), 3.79 (4H, m), 7.08 (1H, t), 7.79 (1H, d), 8.06 (1H, d), 8.26 (1H, s), 8.38 (1H, s), 8.67 (1H, s), 8.79 (1H, s), 10.03 (1H, s), 13.3 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.83 min (99%), m/z (APCI) 381 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 19: 5-(5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-2-morpholinobenzamide Step 1: 5-(5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-2-morpholin-4-yl-benzamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 1 using 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (250 mg, 0.90 mmol) 5-amino-2-morpholin-4-yl benzamide (299 mg, 1.35 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.24 mL, 1.35 mmol) in 2-propanol (7 mL). Trituration with PrOH and Et₂O affords the title compound (273 mg, 73%).

Step 2: 5-(5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-2-morpholinobenzamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using 5-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-2-morpholin-4-yl-benzamide (140 mg, 0.33 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (130 mg, 0.67 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (96 mg, 0.083 mmol) in 1.5M K₂CO₃ (aq) (1.93 mL) and dioxane (3.44 mL). The crude material is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM followed by 99:1 then 97:3 then 95:5 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to afford the title compound as a white solid (40.5 mg, 30%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.96 (4H, m), 3.79 (4H, m), 7.28 (2H, d), 7.45 (1H, m), 7.54 (1H, br s), 8.01-8.09 (1H, dd), 8.25 (1H, s), 8.50 (1H, d), 8.69 (1H, br s), 8.78 (1H, s), 9.98 (1H, s), 13.3 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.23 min (96.9%), m/z (APCI) 406 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 21: 4-(8-(4-(2-Morpholinoethoxy)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)thiophene-2-carboxamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-amine (113 mg, 0.27 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-thiophene-2-carboxamide (136 mg, 0.537 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (78 mg, 0.067 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (1.44 mL, 2.16 mmol) and dioxane (4.3 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 97:3 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to yield the title compound (65 mg, 52%). LCMS: Rt 1.98 min (98.9%). Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid in MeOH (1.1385 mL) affords the title compound (50 mg, 95%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.37 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.21-3.64 (6H, m), 3.76 (2H, t), 4.05 (2H, d), 4.40 (2H, m), 7.09 (2H, d), 7.61 (1H, br s), 8.02 (2H, d), 8.11 (2H, s), 8.48 (1H, s), 8.67 (1H, s), 8.82 (1H, s), 9.91 (1H, br s), 10.09 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 1.98 min (97.7%), m/z (APCI) 466 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 22: 5-(8-(4-(2-Morpholinoethoxy)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)thiophene-2-carboxamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-amine (118 mg, 0.28 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-thiophene-2-carboxamide (142 mg, 0.56 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (81 mg, 0.07 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (1.5 mL, 2.24 mmol) and dioxane (4.5 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 97:3 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to yield the title compound (33 mg, 25%). LCMS: Rt 2.66 min (99%). Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid in MeOH (0.569 mL) affords the title compound (24 mg, 86%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.37 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.25 (2H, m), 3.50-3.64 (4H, m), 3.76 (2H, t), 4.05 (2H, d), 4.40 (2H, m), 7.09 (2H, d), 7.51 (1H, br s), 7.87 (1H, d), 7.99-8.05 (3H, m), 8.11 (1H, br s), 8.37 (1H, s), 8.84 (1H, s), 9.92 (1H, br s), 10.21 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 1.95 min (98.8%), m/z (APCI) 466 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 23: (4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-[5-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-amine Step 1: 1-(Tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole

1H-Pyrazole (14.3 g, 0.21 mol) is dissolved in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (26.74 g, 0.32 mol) in the presence of a catalytic amount of TFA (0.1 mL, 1.3 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 95° C. for 5 hours, cooled and then quenched using NaH (0.2 g, 5 mmol). The solvent is removed to give the title compound as a brown oil (33.3 g, 99%), which is used in the next step without further purification.

Step 2: 1H-Pyrazole-2-boronic acid

To a cooled solution (−78° C.) of 1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (7.6 g, 52 mmol) in THF (50 mL), nBuLi (33 mL, 2.5M in hexane, 82.5 mmol) and triisopropyl borane (12.7 mL, 55 mmol) are added dropwise maintaining the temperature at −70° C. The reaction mixture is stirred at −70° C. for one hour and then allowed to reach room temperature over 4 hours. After quenching the reaction with 2M HCl, the solvent is removed in vacuo and the pH is adjusted to pH 6 using 1M NaOH. A precipitate is formed, collected by filtration and washed with toluene and petroleum ether. Trituration with ethyl acetate affords the target compound as a white solid (2.7 g, 48%), which is used in the next step without further purification.

Step 3: (4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-[5-(2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using 5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(morpholin-4-yl)-phenyl]-amine (100 mg, 0.267 mmol), 1H-pyrazole-2-boronic acid (60 mg, 0.535 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (93 mg, 0.08 mmol) and Na₂CO₃ (88 mg, 0.80 mmol) in DMF (2 mL). The reaction mixture is placed in a stem-tube and stirred at 100° C. for 18 hours. After cooling, the mixture is diluted with NaHCO₃ solution and extracted with EtOAc (4×). The organic layer is washed with water, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to afford a crude product that is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM followed by 96:4 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH). The title compound is isolated after trituration with diethyl ether (12.4 mg, 13%). Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid (0.342 mL, 0.0342 mmol) gives the target compound (10 mg, 81%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.34 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.14 (4H, m), 3.81 (4H, m), 7.04 (2H, d), 7.27 (1H, m), 7.92 (3H, m), 8.24 (1H, s), 8.76 (1H, s), 9.92 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.45 min (97.6%), m/z (APCI) 363 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 28: 4-(8-(4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)thiophene-2-carboxamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using 5-bromo-N-(6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine (100 mg, 0.24 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-thiophene-2-carboxamide (121 mg, 0.48 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (69 mg, 0.059 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (1.28 mL, 1.92 mmol) and dioxane (3.84 mL). The crude product is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM and 97:3 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to yield the title compound (68 mg, 61%) as a pale green solid. Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid in MeOH (1.47 mL, 0.147 mmol) followed by trituration with DCM and diethyl ether, affords the title compound (67 mg, 98.5%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.35 (6H, d), 2.34 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.00 (2H, t), 3.22-3.25 (2H, m), 3.56-3.61 (3H, m), 3.89 (2H, d), 7.09 (2H, d), 7.60 (1H, br s), 7.97 (2H, d), 8.10 (2H, s), 8.48 (1H, s), 8.67 (1H, s), 8.81 (1H, s), 9.23 (1H, br s), 10.03 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.13 min (98.4%), m/z (APCI) 463 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 29: 5-(8-(4-Morpholinophenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)furan-3-carboxamide Step 1: [5-(4-Carbamoyl-furan-2-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 35, step 3 using (4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-(5-tributylstannanyl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (137 mg, 0.199 mmol), 5-bromo-furan-3-carboxamide (76 mg, 0.4 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (23 mg, 0.020 mmol) in DMF (1 mL). Purification of the reaction mixture eluting with 98:2 DCM:MeOH and 96:4 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) affords the title compound (33 mg, 33%).

Step 2: 5-(8-(4-Morpholinophenylamino)-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)furan-3-carboxamide

A solution of [5-(4-carbamoyl-furan-2-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (33 mg, 0.065 mmol) in a mixture 1:1 DCM:TFA (2 mL) (2 drops of water) is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. After addition of sat. Na₂CO₃, a precipitate is formed, collected by filtration and washed with water, diethyl ether and petroleum ether. After drying under vacuum, the title compound is isolated (20 mg, 76%). Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid in MeOH (0.444 mL) yields the title compound (19 mg, 100%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.36 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.22 (4H, m), 3.82-3.89 (4H, m), 7.13 (2H, d), 7.36 (1H, br s), 7.86 (1H, s), 7.95 (3H, m), 8.17 (1H, s), 8.40 (1H, s), 8.84 (1H, s), 10.17 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.60 min (96.9%), m/z (APCI) 406 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 33: 5-(8-(4-Morpholinophenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)isoindolin-1-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (1.0 g, 2.67 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one (see description for Compound 79) (1.03 g, 4.01 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (0.77 g, 0.67 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (14.3 mL) and dioxane (40 mL). Purification by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM followed by 96:4 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) affords the title compound (0.895 g, 79%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.12 (4H, m), 3.79 (4H, m), 4.51 (2H, s), 7.01 (2H, d), 7.84 (1H, d), 7.92 (2H, d), 8.01 (1H, s), 8.09 (1H, d), 8.23 (1H, s), 8.72 (1H, s), 8.73 (1H, s), 10.02 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.51 min (97.8%), m/z (APCI) 428 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 34: 4-(8-(4-Morpholinophenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)furan-2-carboxamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (78 mg, 0.16 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-furan-2-carboxylic acid amide (100 mg, 0.34 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (60 mg, 0.052 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (aq) (1.1 mL, 1.68 mmol), and dioxane (3 mL). The reaction mixture is partitioned between water and ethyl acetate, the title compound precipitates and is collected by filtration. Purification of the solid by silica gel column chromatography, eluting with DCM and 95:5 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH), affords the title compound (42 mg, 65%). Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid (0.82 mL) gives a solid which is triturated with diethyl ether to afford the title compound (30.5 mg). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.19 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.03-3.07 (4H, m), 3.67 (4H, m), 6.99 (2H, br s), 7.43 (1H, d), 7.74-7.82 (4H, m), 8.06 (1H, br s), 8.59 (1H, br s), 8.64 (1H, s), 9.91 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.64 min (98.1%), m/z (APCI) 406 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 35: 6-(8-(4-Morpholinophenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)-3,4-dihydroisoquinolin-1(2H)-one Step 1: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester

A solution of 5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(morpholin-4-yl)-phenyl]-amine (300 mg, 0.800 mmol), dimethylaminopyridine (10 mg, 0.08 mmol) and di-tert butyl dicarbonate (523 mg, 2.4 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 ml) is stirred at 50° C. overnight. The reaction mixture is partitioned between DCM and water and the organic layer is washed with 1N NaOH and brine. The organic layer is dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a crude compound purified by silica gel column chromatography. Elution with 98:2 DCM:MeOH yields the title compound (352 mg, 93%). LCMS: Rt 3.45 min (97.8%).

Step 2: (4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-(5-tributylstannanyl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester

To a cooled (−78° C.) solution of (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (370 mg, 0.78 mmol) in THF (12 mL), are added 2M isopropylmagnesium chloride in THF (0.78 mL, 1.56 mmol), and after 5 minutes stirring, tributyltin chloride (0.42, 1.56 mmol) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred at −78° C. for 15 minutes and at room temperature for an additional 15 minutes. After removing the solvent, the residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 5:1 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate followed by 1:1 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate. The title compound is isolated (105 mg, 20%).

Step 3: (4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-[5-(1-oxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-isoquinolin-6-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester

To a degassed solution of (4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-(5-tributylstannanyl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (100 mg, 0.15 mmol) and 6-bromo-3,4-dihydro-2H-isoquinolin-1-one in DMF (1 mL) is added tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (17 mg, 0.015 mmol) and the reaction mixture is stirred at 90° C. overnight. After removing the solvent in vacuo, the residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography. Elution with 1:1 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate and ethyl acetate affords the target compound as a yellow solid (30 mg, 37%).

Step 4: 6-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-3,4-dihydro-2H-isoquinolin-1-one

A solution of (4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-[5-(1-oxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-isoquinolin-6-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (30 mg, 0.055 mmol) in a 1:1 mixture of TFA:DCM (1 drop of H₂O), is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue partitioned between ethyl acetate and sat. NaHCO₃ (aq). The water layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (2×). The organic layers are combined and evaporated to afford a residue purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate. The title compound is isolated (18 mg, 75%) and converted into the mesylate salt (16.6 mg, 97%) using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid (0.317 mL) in MeOH. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.36 (3H, s MsOH), 3.04 (2H, t), 3.21 (4H, m), 3.47 (2H, t), 3.83 (4H, m), 7.11 (2H, d), 7.95-8.02 (6H, m), 8.05 (1H, s), 8.74 (1H, s), 10.09 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.81 min (97.9%), m/z (APCI) 442 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 36: 5-(8-(4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)isoindolin-1-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using 5-bromo-N-(6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine (0.6 g, 1.44 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one (0.56 g, 2.16 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (0.416 g, 0.36 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (7.7 mL) and dioxane (23 mL). Purification by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM followed by 98:2 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) affords the title compound (0.36 g, 53%) which is converted into the mesylate salt using 1M methanesulfonic acid in MeOH (0.77 mL). After trituration with diethyl ether and DCM the title compound is isolated as a solid (0.410 g). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.35 (6H, d), 2.35 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.04 (2H, t), 3.20-3.27 (2H, m), 3.56-3.63 (3H, m), 3.89 (2H, d), 4.52 (2H, s), 7.09 (2H, d), 7.85 (1H, d), 7.95-8.01 (3H, m), 8.10 (1H, d), 8.24 (1H, s), 8.72 (1H, s), 8.74 (1H, s), 9.27 (1H, br s), 10.07 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.93 min (97.9%), m/z (ES⁺) 469 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 37: {5-[5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-2-morpholinophenyl}methanol Step 1: (2-Morpholin-4-yl-5-nitro-phenyl)-methanol

To a cooled (0° C.) solution of 2-morpholin-4-yl-5-nitro-benzaldehyde (0.8 g, 3.39 mmol) in MeOH (5 mL) is added NaBH₄ (0.125 g, 3.39 mmol) and the reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 3 hours. After quenching the reaction with water, the solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue dissolved in ethyl acetate and washed with brine. The organic layer is dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to afford the title compound (870 mg), which is used in the next step without further purification.

Step 2: (5-Amino-2-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-methanol

To a solution of (2-morpholin-4-yl-5-nitro-phenyl)-methanol (870 mg) in ethanol (40 mL) palladium hydroxide (87 mg) is added and the mixture is stirred in a Parr-apparatus under hydrogen pressure (10 bars) for 4 hours. The reaction mixture is filtrated over Celite 521, washed with ethanol and concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound (640 mg, 83%).

Step 3: 3-(tert-Butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenylamine

A solution of (5-amino-2-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-methanol (640 mg, 3.07 mmol), tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (509 mg, 3.38 mmol) and imidazole (250 mg, 3.68 mmol) in dimethylformamide (20 mL) is stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue partitioned between water and ethyl acetate. The organic layer is washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to afford a crude product. Purification, using silica gel column chromatography, eluting with DCM followed by a 95:5 mixture DCM:MeOH, affords the title compound as a pink solid (390 mg, 27%).

Step 4: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[3-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl]-amine

A mixture of 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (0.391 g, 1.41 mmol), 3-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenylamine (0.5 g, 1.55 mmol) and N-ethyldiisopropyl-amine (0.27 mL, 1.55 mmol) is heated at 90° C. in 2-propanol (10 mL) for 8 hours. The reaction mixture is evaporated to dryness and the residue partitioned between dichloromethane and water. The aqueous phase is extracted twice with dichloromethane. The organic layers are combined, washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtrated and concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound (335 mg, 46%).

Step 5: [5-(5-Bromo-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-2-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl]-methanol

A solution of 5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[3-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl]-amine (285 mg, 0.549 mmol) in 1M tetrabutylammonium fluoride solution in THF (0.63 mL), is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The reaction mixture is partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer is washed with 10% citric acid solution and brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to afford the title compound as a cream solid (100 mg, 45%).

Step 6: {5-[5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-2-morpholinophenyl}methanol

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using [5-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-2-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl]-methanol (85 mg, 0.21 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxa-borolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (81 mg, 0.42 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (60 mg, 0.052 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (1.12 mL) and dioxane (2.0 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluting with 95:3 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) followed by reverse phase preparative HPLC purification. The title compound is obtained as a pale brown solid (10 mg, 12%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.87 (4H, m), 3.77 (4H, m), 4.63 (2H, d), 5.12 (1H, t), 7.11 (1H, d), 7.84 (1H, d), 8.12 (1H, s), 8.21 (1H, s), 8.39 (1H, s), 8.69 (1H, s), 8.77 (1H, s), 9.78 (1H, s), 13.29 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.45 min (96.3%), m/z (APCI) 393 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 41: (6-[Morpholin-4-yl]pyridin-3-yl)-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 120, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(6-morpholin-4-yl-pyridin-3-yl)amine in Step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.80 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 364 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 42: [6-(4-[Cyclopropylmethyl]piperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

This compound may be prepared using the methods described for Compound 120, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[6-(4-[cyclopropylmethyl]piperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]amine in step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.80 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 417 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 43: [6-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 120, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]amine in Step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.77 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 405 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 44: [5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-{6-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)piperazin-1-yl]pyridin-3-yl}amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 120, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-{6-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)piperazin-1-yl]-pyridin-3-yl}amine in step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.95 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 445 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 46: {4-[4-(Cyclopropylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl]phenyl}-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 120, Step 4, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-{4-[4-cyclopropylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl]phenyl}amine. LCMS: Rt=1.02 (95%), m/z (ESI)=444 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 47: 4-[8-(6-[Morpholin-4-yl]pyridin-3-ylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 167, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(6-morpholin-4-yl-pyridin-3-yl)amine in Step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.85 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 423 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 48: (5-Benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-ylphenyl)amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 120, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-ylphenyl)amine and 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-benzo[b]thiophen-3-yl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolane in step 4. LCMS: Rt 0.84 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 402 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 50: (4-Morpholin-4-ylphenyl)-(5-thiophen-3-yl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 120, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-ylphenyl)amine and 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-thiophen-3-yl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolane in step 4. LCMS: Rt 1.19 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 379 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 51: [4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenyl]-(5-thiophen-3-yl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)amine

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 50, using (5-bromo[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]amine in the final step. LCMS: rt=1.11 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 420 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 52: 5-(5-Ethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-N-(4-morpholinophenyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine Step 1: 3-Ethyl-1H-pyrazole

To a stirred solution of 1-trimethylsilanyl-pent-1-yn-3-one (0.5 g, 3.25 mmol) and hydrazine sulphate salt (0.56 g, 4.33 mmol) in ethanol (15 mL), is added sat. Na₂CO₃ (0.52 g, 4.87 mmol) and the mixture is refluxed at 90° C. for 5 hours. The reaction mixture is diluted with water and brine and extracted using diethyl ether (3×). The organic layers are combined, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to afford a crude product, purified by silica gel column chromatography. Elution with 90:10 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate afford the title compound (0.1196 g, 36%).

Step 2: 4-Bromo-5-ethyl-1H-pyrazole

To a stirred solution of 3-ethyl-1H-pyrazole (0.114 g, 1.186 mmol) in acetic acid (2 mL), bromine (0.061 mL, 1.186 mmol) is added and the mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The reaction mixture is basified with sat. NaHCO₃, and extracted using ethyl acetate (3×). The organic layers are combined, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to give the title compound (0.180 g, 87%). The compound is used in the next step without further purification.

Step 3: 4-Bromo-5-ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole and 4-Bromo-3-ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole

4-Bromo-5-ethyl-1H-pyrazole (0.179 g, 1.032 mmol) is dissolved in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (0.28 mL, 3.098 mmol) in the presence of a catalytic amount of TFA (0.001 mL, 0.00103 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 90° C. for 3 hours, cooled and then quenched using NaH (1.5 mg, 0.0061 mmol). After removing the solvent, the residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with a mixture of 90:10 petroleum ether-ethyl acetate. The fractions containing the desired compounds are collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compounds (175 mg, 66%).

Step 4: 5-Ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole and 3-Ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 86, step 2 using 4-bromo-5-ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole and 4-bromo-3-ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (168 mg, 0.65 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (331 mg, 1.3 mmol), PdCl₂dppf (53 mg, 65 μmol) and KOAc (190 mg, 1.95 mmol) in dimethylsulfoxide (2 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 90:10 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate to afford the title compounds (61.1 mg, 31%).

Step 5: {5-[5-Ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl}-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine and {5-[3-Ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl}-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (0.032 g, 0.085 mmol), 5-ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole and 3-ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (0.52 mg, 0.17 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (0.025 mg, 0.021 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (aq) (0.45 mL, 0.6 mmol) and dioxane (2 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 1:1 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate followed by 1:4 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate to yield the title compound (45 mg).

Step 6: 5-(5-Ethyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-N-(4-morpholinophenyl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine

A solution of {5-[5-ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl}-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine and {5-[3-ethyl-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl}-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (40 mg, 0.077 mmol) and conc. HCl (0.3 mL) in MeOH (10 mL) is stirred at room temperature for 5 hours. After removing the solvent, the solid residue is partitioned between ethyl acetate and sat. NaHCO₃. The undissolved solid is collected by filtration, washed with water, diethyl ether and petroleum ether and dried to afford the title compound (5 mg, 17%). Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid (0.128 mL) affords the title compound (5.6 mg, 89%) as a solid.

¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.13 (3H, m), 2.29 (3H, s, MsOH), 2.74 (2H, m), 3.29 (4H, m), 3.77 (4H, m), 7.06 (2H, m), 7.62 (1H, s), 7.89 (2H, d), 8.00 (1H, s), 8.61 (1H, s), 9.83 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.69 min (98.4%), m/z (APCI) 391 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 53: 6-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-1,1-dioxo-1,2-dihydro-1λ⁶-benzo[d]isothiazol-3-one Step 1: 1,1-Dioxo-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1,2-dihydro-1λ⁶-benzo[d]isothiazol-3-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 86, step 2 using 6-bromo-1,1-dioxo-1,2-dihydro-1λ⁶-benzo[d]isothiazol-3-one (0.5, 1.9 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (0.53 g, 2.1 mmol), PdCl₂dppf (0.047 g, 0.058 mmol) and KOAc (0.56 g, 5.7 mmol) in dioxane (10 mL). The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue is partitioned between DCM and water. The organic layer is washed with sat NaHCO₃ and 2M HCl, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to afford the title compound (990 mg, 169%) used in the next step without further purification.

Step 2: (4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-[5-(1,1,3-trioxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-1λ⁶-benzo[d]isothiazol-6-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (170 mg, 0.36 mmol), 1,1-dioxo-6-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1,2-dihydro-1λ⁶-benzo[d]isothiazol-3-one (374 mg, 0.72 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (100 mg, 0.082 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (2 mL, 3 mmol) and dioxane (6 mL). Purification of the reaction mixture by silica gel column chromatography using 1:1 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate affords a compound still impure. A second silica gel column chromatography eluting with 10:1 DCM:MeOH affords the title compound (91 mg, 44%).

Step 3: 6-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-1,1-dioxo-1,2-dihydro-1λ⁶-benzo[d]isothiazol-3-one

A suspension of (4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-[5-(1,1,3-trioxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-1 λ⁶-benzo[d]isothiazol-6-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (100 mg, 0.173 mmol) in 4M HCl (2.5 mL) in dioxane is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. The solvent is removed under vacuum and the residue is triturated with DCM, diethyl ether and petroleum ether to afford the title compound (84 mg, 100%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.25 (4H, m), 3.85 (4H, m), 7.20 (2H, d), 7.88 (2H, d), 8.16 (1H, d), 8.24 (1H, s), 8.58 (1H, d), 8.82 (2H, s), 8.96 (1H, s), 10.31 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.31 min (95.7%), m/z (APCI) 478 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 54: 4-{8-[6-(4-[Cyclopropylmethyl]piperazin-1-yl)-pyridin-3-ylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using the methods described for Compound 120, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[6-(4-[cyclopropylmethyl]piperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]amine in step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.85 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 476 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 55: 4-{8-[6-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-ylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 167, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]amine in Step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.82 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 464 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 56: 4-(8-{6-[4-(2,2,2-Trifluoroethyl)piperazin-1-yl]-pyridin-3-ylamino}-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 167, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-{6-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)piperazin-1-yl]-pyridin-3-yl}amine in step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.99 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 504 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 57: 4-(8-{4-[4-(2,2,2-Trifluoroethyl)piperazin-1-yl]-phenylamino}-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 58, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-{4-[4-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)piperazin-1-yl]phenyl}amine. LCMS: Rt=1.07 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 503 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 58: 4-{8-[4-(4-(Cyclopropylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 46, using 2-(aminocarbonyl)thiophene-4-boronic acid. LCMS: Rt=0.93 (95%), m/z (ESI) 475 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 59: [4-(4-Cyclopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenyl]-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 46, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-cyclopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]amine. LCMS: Rt=0.84 (95%), m/z (ESI) 402 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 60: [6-(4-Cyclopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

This compound may be prepared using the methods described for Compound 120, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[6-(4-cyclopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]amine in step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.76 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 403 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 61: 4-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-ylphenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]thiazole-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 73, using ammonia (7 M in MeOH) is used in step 3. LCMS: Rt=1.00 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 423 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 62: 4-{8-[4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}thiazole-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 61, using (5-bromo[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]amine in the final step. LCMS: rt=0.96 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 464 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 63: 4-(8-{4-[1-(2,2,2-Trifluoroethyl)piperidin-4-yl]phenylamino}-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide Step 1: 1-Trifluoroacetyl-4-(4-nitrophenyl)piperidine

Triethylamine (1.0 mL, 7.3 mmol) and 4-(4-nitrophenyl)piperidine (1.0 g, 4.8 mmol) are stirred in DCM (25 mL) at 0° C. under N₂ and trifluoroacetic anhydride (0.81 mL, 5.8 mmol) is added. The mixture is stirred for three days, allowing the temperature to warm to rt. The solution is then diluted with DCM (50 mL) and washed with water (2×15 mL), NaHCO₃ (50% sat. aq., 2×15 mL) and brine (15 mL). The solvent is dried over MgSO₄ and evaporated to afford the desired compound (1.46 g, 4.66 mmol).

Step 2: 1-(2,2,2-Trifluoroethyl)-4-(4-nitrophenyl)piperidine

A solution of 1-trifluoroacetyl-4-(4-nitrophenyl)piperidine (1.42 g, 4.7 mmol) in THF (15 mL) is stirred in 25 mL 2-necked flask fitted with a condenser and pressure-equalizing addition funnel. The system is flushed with N₂, NaBH₄ (210 mg, 5.6 mmol) is added and the flask is cooled to 0° C. A solution of iodine (600 mg, 2.3 mmol) in THF (5 mL) is then added dropwise over 20 minutes, after which the addition funnel is removed and the mixture heated at reflux overnight. The resulting pale yellow suspension is cooled to rt and MeOH (1.5 mL) is added cautiously, causing vigorous evolution of a gas. Evaporation of the solvents affords the title compound, which is used without further purification.

Step 3: 4-[1-(2,2,2-Trifluoroethyl)piperidin-4-yl]phenylamine

Ammonium formate (1.38 g, 22 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (230 mg, 0.2 mmol) are added to a solution of 1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-4-(4-nitrophenyl)piperidine (1.26 g, 4.4 mmol) in EtOH (10 mL) and EtOAc (10 mL). The suspension is heated at reflux for 24 hours, adding further portions of ammonium formate (2 g) after 4 h and 8 h. The mixture is filtered through celite and evaporated to afford an orange solid. This is partitioned between DCM (40 mL) and water (20 mL) and the layers separated. The aqueous phase is extracted with DCM (2×20 mL) and the combined organic layers are dried over MgSO4 and evaporated under reduced pressure to afford N-{4-[1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)piperidin-4-yl]phenyl}formamide as a pale orange solid (980 mg).

A solution of the formamide in MeOH (20 mL) is stirred at rt and HCl (conc., 1 mL) is added. The deep purple solution is heated at reflux for 1 h, cooled and the MeOH is evaporated. The residue is stirred with water (20 mL) and NaHCO₃ (sat. aq.) is added until bubbling ceases. The mixture is extracted with DCM (20 mL, 2×10 mL) and the combined extracts are dried over MgSO₄ and evaporated under reduced pressure to afford the title compound as an orange solid (870 mg).

This material is used to prepare 4-(8-{4-[1-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)piperidin-4-yl]phenylamino}-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide using methods analogous to those used for Compound 89.

LCMS: Rt=2.11 min (100%), m/z (ESI) 502 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 65: 5-(8-(4-(2-Morpholinoethoxy)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)isoindolin-1-one Step 1: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-amine

According to the procedure described for Compound 6, step 1, 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (0.5 g, 1.799 mmol), 4-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethoxy)-phenylamine (0.6 g, 4.5 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (0.47 mL, 2.7 mmol) in 2-propanol (6 mL) are stirred at 95° C. overnight. After evaporation of the solvent the residue is dissolved in DCM and washed with water (2×) and brine. The organic layer is dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil purified by silica gel column chromatography. Elution with a 97:3 mixture DCM:MeOH gives the title compound (650 mg 86%) as a light yellow solid. LCMS: Rt 2.06 nm in (97.7%).

Step 2: 5-(8-(4-(2-Morpholinoethoxy)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)isoindolin-1-one

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(2-morpholin-4-yl-ethoxy)-phenyl]-amine (80 mg, 0.19 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one (74 mg, 0.29 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (55 mg, 0.047 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (1.02 mL, 1.53 mmol) and dioxane (3 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM and a 97:3 mixture DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH). After trituration using diethyl ether, the title compound is isolated as a solid (61.9 mg, 69%). Conversion of the material into the mesylate salt, using 1M methanesulfonic acid (0.134 mL) in MeOH, affords the title compound (57.1 mg). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.40 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.25-3.38 (2H, m), 3.60-3.78 (4H, m), 3.84 (2H, t), 4.09 (2H, d), 4.45 (2H, m), 4.56 (2H, s), 7.14 (2H, d), 7.90 (1H, d), 8.05-8.19 (4H, m), 8.28 (1H, s), 8.76 (1H, br s), 8.79 (1H, s), 10.00 (1H, br s), 10.16 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 1.98 min (99.1%), m/z (APCI) 472 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 67: N-(2-Fluoro-4-morpholinophenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine Step 1: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(2-fluoro-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 1, using 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (0.105 g, 0.89 mmol), 2-fluoro-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenylamine (93 mg, 0.474 mmol), DIPEA (0.123 mL, 0.706 mmol) and 1,4-diazabicyclo[2.2.2]octane (53 mg, 0.472 mmol) in 2-propanol (2 mL). The reaction mixture is partitioned between DCM and 10% citric acid (aq) solution, the organic layer is separated and washed with 10% citric acid solution, water and brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The title compound is isolated as a pale red solid (77 mg, 42%) and used in the next step without further purification. LCMS: Rt 3.48 min (89%).

Step 2: N-(2-Fluoro-4-morpholinophenyl)-5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-(2-fluoro-4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (80 mg, 0.203 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (79 mg, 0.406 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (59 mg, 0.051 mmol) in 1.5N Na₂CO₃ (1.09 mL, 1.62 mmol) and dioxane (3.25 mL). The reaction mixture is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 97:3 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH). The fractions containing the product are combined and evaporated in vacuo to afford a solid which is triturated with diethyl ether and petroleum ether to yield the title compound (29 mg, 38%). LCMS: Rt 2.90 min (96%).

Conversion into the mesylate salt using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid solution in MeOH (0.762 mL, 0.076 mmol) affords the title compound (35 mg). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 2.36 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.19 (4H, m), 3.79 (4H, m), 6.84-6.94 (2H, m), 7.54 (1H, t), 8.08 (1H, s), 8.48 (2H, s), 8.76 (1H, s), 9.31 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.91 min (95.4%), m/z (APCI) 381 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 70: (4-(8-(4-Morpholinophenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)methanol Step 1: 4-Bromo-5-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1H-pyrazole

A solution of (4-bromo-2H-pyrazol-3-yl)-methanol (0.64 mg, 3.63 mmol), tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (0.82 g, 5.45 mmol) and imidazole (0.42 g, 6.18 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (20 mL) is stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with a 50:50 mixture diethyl ether:ethyl acetate and washed with water (3×). The organic layers are dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 80:20 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate to afford the title compound (1.035 g, 98%).

Step 2: 4-Bromo-3-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole and 4-Bromo-5-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole

4-Bromo-5-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1H-pyrazole (1 g, 3.45 mmol) is dissolved in 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (0.944 mL, 10.34 mmol) in the presence of a catalytic amount of TFA (0.0026 mL, 0.035 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 90° C. for 18 hours, cooled and then quenched using NaH (4.69 mg, 0.206 mmol). After removing the solvent, the residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with a mixture of 95:5 petroleum ether-ethyl acetate, followed by 90:10 petroleum ether-ethyl acetate. The fractions containing the desired compounds are collected and concentrated in vacuo to afford 4-bromo-3-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole and 4-bromo-5-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (724 mg, 56%).

Step 3: {5-[5-(tert-Butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl}-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester and {5-[3-(tert-Butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl}-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 35, step 3 using (4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-(5-tributylstannanyl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-carbamic acid tert-butyl ester (210 mg, 0.30 mmol) 4-bromo-3-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole and 4-bromo-5-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (170 mg, 0.45 mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (35 mg, 0.030 mmol) in DMF (4 mL). The crude compound is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 7:3 then 3:7 petroleum ether:ethyl acetate to afford the title compounds (62.5 mg).

Step 4: (4-(8-(4-Morpholinophenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)methanol

A solution of {5-[3-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl}-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine and {5-[5-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-1-(tetrahydro-pyran-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-4-yl]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl}-(4-morpholin-4-yl-phenyl)-amine (53.6 mg, 0.077 mmol) and conc. HCl (0.27 mL) in MeOH (5 mL) is stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. After removing the solvent, the residue is partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The aqueous layer is washed with ethyl acetate (3×) and the combined organic layers are dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue is dissolved in 4M HCl in dioxane, concentrated in vacuo and then partitioned between ethyl acetate and sat. NaHCO₃. The organic layer is dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a crude compound purified by silica gel column chromatography. The title compound is isolated eluting with EtOAc and a 95:5 mixture DCM:MeOH (5.4 mg, 18%).

¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.11 (4H, m), 3.79 (4H, m), 4.65 (2H, d), 5.25 and 5.53 (1H, br s), 6.99 (2H, m), 7.84 and 8.51 (1H, br s), 7.92 (2H, d), 8.12 (1H, d), 8.70 (1H, s), 9.74 (1H, s), 13.12 and 13.23 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.26 min (96.2%), m/z (APCI) 393 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 73: 4-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-thiazole-2-carboxylic acid methylamide Step 1: 2,4-Dibromothiazole

Thiazolidinone (3.43 g, 29.32 mmol) and POBr₃ (25 g, 87.96 mmol, 3 equiv.) are mixed under nitrogen as solids. The reaction mixture is then heated to 110° C. under stirring for 3 h causing the formation of a black syrup. The reaction mixture is then allowed to cool down to room temperature and a mixture of water/ice (200 mL) is added very cautiously. The resulting grey suspension is extracted with diethyl ether (3×50 mL), the organic layers are combined, filtered through a silica plug and evaporated to afford the title compound as an orange oil (4 g, 57%) which is used in the next step without further purification.

Step 2: 4-Bromothiazole-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester

To a solution of dibromothiazole (1 g, 4.15 mmol) in THF (15 mL) at 0° C., is added dropwise a solution of iPrMgCl in THF (2 M, 2.3 mL, 4.57 mmol, 1.10 equiv.). The reaction is stirred at 0° C. for 0.25 h. To the resulting orange solution is added via a cannula, diethyl carbonate (3 mL) in THF (5 ml). The resulting green solution is stirred further at room temperature for 0.5 h, at which point the reaction is quenched by adding saturated NH₄Cl. The title compound is purified by LC using 6/4 cyclohexane/DCM as the eluent to afford 514.2 mg (52%) of the title compound as a pale yellow powdery solid.

Step 3: 4-Bromothiazole-2-carboxylic acid methylamide

4-Bromothiazole-2-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (500 mg, 2.13 mmol) is dissolved in methanol (1 mL) and methyl amine in methanol (10 mL) is added. The mixture is stirred overnight at room temperature. Evaporation of the solvent under reduced pressure affords the title compound as yellow solid. LCMS: Rt 0.92 min (100%) m/z (ESI) 219/221 (M+H)⁺.

Step 4: 4-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-thiazole-2-carboxylic acid methylamide

4-Bromothiazole-2-carboxylic acid methylamide is converted to the boronate in a fashion analogous to that described for Compound 6, Step 3. The title compound is then prepared using methods as described for Compound 120, step 4. LCMS: Rt=1.06 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 437 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 79: 5-(8-(6-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-ylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)isoindolin-1-one Step 1: 4-Bromo-2-bromomethyl-benzoic acid methyl ester

4-Bromo-2-methyl-benzoic acid (4.6 g, 21.39 mmol) is dissolved in 2M HCl in MeOH and refluxed for 3 hours. The solvent is evaporated to give the 4-bromo-2-methyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (4.24 g, 86%). This intermediate (18.51 mmol) is dissolved in carbon tetrachloride (100 mL) and N-bromosuccinimide (NBS) (5.57 g, 24.06 mmol) is added. AIBN (122 mg, 740 μmol) is then added and the mixture purged with nitrogen for 5 min. The reaction mixture is then refluxed for 4 hours. After cooling to room temperature the reaction mixture is filtered and the filtrate is evaporated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, 2:1 petroleum ether/ethyl acetate) to give the title compound (3.42 g, 60%).

Step 2: 5-Bromo-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one

4-Bromo-2-bromomethyl-benzoic acid methyl ester (0.5 g, 16.2 mmol) is treated with methanolic ammonia (10 mL, 7 N NH₃ in MeOH) for 5 minutes at 90° C. After cooling to room temperature a precipitate is formed, collected by filtration and washed with a small amount of methanol to afford the title compound as a colourless solid (224 mg, 65%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 4.41 (2H, s), 7.64 (1H, d), 7.70 (1H, d), 7.87 (1H, s), 8.67 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 2.49 min, (99.6%), m/z (APCI) 212 (M+H)⁺.

Step 3: 5-(4,4,5,5-Tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one

5-Bromo-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one (230 mg, 1.08 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (300 mg, 1.18 mmol), PdCl₂dppf (25 mg, 31 mol) and KOAc (320 mg, 3.26 mmol) are suspended in dioxane (4 mL), purged with nitrogen for 5 minutes and then heated at 85° C. overnight. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×) and the combined organic phases are washed once with brine, filtered through MgSO₄ and evaporated. The solid residue is triturated with hexane and dried in vacuo to yield the title compound (185 mg, 66%) as a grey solid. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ (ppm) 1.37 (12H, s), 4.45 (2H, s), 6.38 (1H, br s), 7.87 (1H, d), 7.93 (2H, m).

Step 4: 1-Isopropyl-4-(5-nitro-pyridin-2-yl)-piperazine

To a solution of 2-chloro-5-nitropyridine (2.5 g, 15.7 mmol) in THF (25 mL), are added 1-isopropylpiperazine (2.01 g, 15.7 mmol) and K₂CO₃ (3.25 g, 23.6 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at 50° C. for 4 hours and then at 70° C. overnight. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the resultant orange solid is triturated using 10:1 petroleum ether-diethyl ether. The isolated compound (3.7 g, 94%) is used in the next step without further purification.

Step 5: 6-(4-Isopropyl-piperazin-1-yl)-pyridin-3-yl-amine

1-Isopropyl-4-(5-nitro-pyridin-2-yl)-piperazine (0.9 g, 3.6 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (20 mL) and tin (II) dichloride dihydrate (4 g, 18 mmol) is added. The mixture is cooled using a water bath and conc. HCl is added (4 mL). The reaction is stirred at room temperature overnight. After removing the methanol, the resultant light yellow solution is basified using conc. NaOH (pH 11) and a white precipitate is formed. The solid is collected by filtration and the water is extracted with diethyl ether (5×). The organic layers are combined, dried over MgSO₄, filtered, concentrated under vacuum to afford an orange oil which crystallizes on standing to afford an orange solid (0.68 g, 86%).

Step 6: 5-Bromo-8-(6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 1, using 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (0.188 g, 0.68 mmol), 6-(4-isopropyl-piperazin-1-yl)-pyridin-3-ylamine (0.180 g, 0.816 mmol) and N-ethyldiisopropyl-amine (0.20 mL, 1.02 mmol) in 2-propanol (2 mL). Purification of the crude material by silica gel column chromatography, using DCM followed by 95:5 DCM:MeOH, affords the title compound as a pale brown solid (260 mg, 92%).

Step 5: 5-(8-(6-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-ylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)isoindolin-1-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using 5-bromo-N-(6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine (50 mg, 0.12 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one (56 mg, 0.216 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (35 mg, 0.03 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (0.64 mL) and dioxane (2 mL). The crude product is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 95:5 DCM:MeOH followed by 90:10 DCM:MeOH. The title compound is obtained after trituration with a 10:1 mixture n-hexane:DCM (19 mg, 34%). Conversion into the mesylate salt, using 0.1M methanesulfonic acid (0.35 mL), gives the title compound as a yellow solid (20 mg, 69%).

¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.34 (6H, d), 2.36 (6H, s, 2xMsOH), 3.16-3.21 (5H, m), 3.57 (2H, m), 4.45 (2H, d), 4.52 (2H, s), 7.11 (1H, d), 7.86 (1H, d), 8.01 (1H, s), 8.10 (1H, d), 8.24-8.29 (2H, m), 8.72 (1H, s), 8.76 (1H, s), 8.82 (1H, d), 9.39 (1H, br s), 10.21 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 1.92 min (98.5%), m/z (APCI) 470 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 80: 3-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-ylphenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid amide Step 1: 1-Bromo-2-(2-ethoxyvinylsulfanyl)benzene

To a solution of 2-bromothiophenol (10.50 g, 55.87 mmol) in dry DMF (50 mL) under nitrogen is added cautiously potassium carbonate (9.2 mL, 61.46 mmol, 1.10 equiv.). Once bubbling has subsided, 2-bromo-1,1-diethoxyethane (8.46 g, 61.46 mmol, 1.10 equiv.) is added to the mixture and stirred for 2 h at room temperature. The resulting suspension is poured onto 200 mL of iced water and extracted with diethyl ether (3×50 mL). The organic layers are washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄ to afford after solvent removal the title compound as a viscous orange oil, used without further purification.

Step 2: 7-bromobenzo[b]thiophene

1-Bromo-2-(2-ethoxyvinylsulfanyl)benzene is dissolved in chlorobenzene (50 mL) and the solution is heated to 70° C. PPA (10.5 mL) is then added carefully and the biphasic mixture is heated at 150° C. overnight. The resulting dark syrup is allowed to cool down and the supernatant solvent removed by pipette. Chlorobenzene (15 mL) is added to the residue and heated to 150° C. for 30 min. The solvent is removed again and the residue washed with small amounts of dichloromethane until the washings are clear. The organic fractions are combined and filtered through celite to afford a clear yellow solution. Concentration under vacuum followed by LC using cyclohexane as the eluent provided the title compound as a viscous colourless oil (1.21 g, 35%).

Step 3: Benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester

7-bromobenzo[b]thiophene (500 mg, 2.36 mmol) is dissolved in dry THF (5.0 mL) under nitrogen. Magnesium turnings (530 mg, 2.83 mmol, 1.20 equiv.) are added and the resulting mixture is heated at reflux until dissolution of the magnesium has occurred. The resulting cloudy yellow solution is allowed to cool to rt and diethyl carbonate (2 mL, excess) is added and stirring continued for one hour, when ammonium chloride (10% aq) is added. The resulting mixture is partitioned between DCM and water and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM. The organic fractions are combined, washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄ and adsorbed onto silica. Purification by LC using 8/2 cyclohexane/dichloromethane as the eluent afforded the title compound as a pale orange oil (346.2 mg, 71%).

Step 4: Benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid

To a solution of benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.0 g, 48 mmol) in methanol (10 mL) and water (10 mL) is added sodium hydroxide (5 g, excess). The solution is stirred at room temperature for 30 min; at which point all the ester has been consumed. The reaction mixture is adjusted to pH 1 by adding 6M HCl solution, and extracted with DCM. The combined organic layers are filtered through a silica plug to afford the title compound as a yellow solid (505.2 mg, 59%).

Step 5: Benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid amide

A solution of benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid (505 mg, 2.84 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) is stirred at rt and thionyl chloride (669 mg, 5.68 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) is added, followed by DMF (0.06 mL), causing gas evolution. The resulting solution is stirred at rt for 1 hour. Aqueous ammonia (10 mL) is then added cautiously to the mixture causing vigorous gas evolution. The resulting mixture is then diluted with water (50 mL), and pH is brought to neutral by adding saturated NaHCO₃ (aq.). The aqueous layer is extracted with DCM, and the organic layers are combined and dried over Na₂SO₄. Evaporation of the solvent under reduced pressure affords the title compound (81% pure) as a yellow solid (500 mg, 98%) which is used without further purification.

Step 6: 3-Bromobenzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid amide

A solution of benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid amide (500 mg, 2.82 mmol) in dichloromethane (5 mL) is stirred at rt and acetic acid (5 mL) is added followed by NBS (750 mg, 4.23 mmol, 1.5 equiv.). The reaction is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour at which point LC-MS analysis shows full conversion of the starting material to the desired compound (79%) and dibrominated material (21%). The reaction is diluted with water (50 mL), neutralized with aqueous potassium disulfite, followed by sodium bicarbonate. The aqueous layer is then extracted with dichloromethane and the resulting organic layers are combined, washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄ and evaporated. The crude material is purified by LC using DCM as the eluent to afford the title compound as a white solid (300 mg, 41%).

Step 7: 3-(4,4,5,5-Tetramethyl[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid amide

A solution of 3-bromobenzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid amide (300 mg, 1.18 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) is stirred under nitrogen. Pd(dppf)Cl₂ (29 mg, 3 mol %), potassium acetate (230 mg, 2.35 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) and bispinacolatodiboron (450 mg, 1.77 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) are added, and the reaction is heated to 80° C. and stirred overnight. The resulting orange suspension is diluted with DCM, filtered through celite and concentrated under vacuum to afford an oil that is used in the next step without further purification.

Step 8: 3-[8-(4-Morpholin-4-yl-phenylamino)-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 120, Step 4. ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.19 (4H, br s), 3.76 (4H, br s), 5.70 (1H, d), 7.12 (2H, m), 7.43 (1H, t), 7.63 (1H, br s), 7.76-7.80 (2H, m), 7.92 (1H, d), 8.03 (1H, d), 8.21 (1H, s), 8.28 (1H, s), 8.6 (1H, s) 10.09 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt=1.01 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 472 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 81: 3-{8-[4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}benzo[b]thiophene-7-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 80, using (5-bromo[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]amine in the final step. LCMS: rt=0.94 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 513 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 83: (4-{8-[4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}pyridin-2-yl)methanol Step 1: 4-Bromo-2-methylpyridine-1-oxide

A solution of 4-bromo-2-methylpyridine (5 g, 29 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) is cooled to 0° C. and m-CPBA (7.55 g, 43.87 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) is added portionwise over 30 min. The ice bath is then removed and the mixture is allowed to stir at room temperature for 3 hours. The resulting solution is diluted with sodium bicarbonate (sat. aq.) and extracted with DCM. The organic layers are combined, washed with sodium bicarbonate (sat. aq.), dried over Na₂SO₄, and concentrated under vacuum to afford the title compound as a pale orange oil which is without further purification.

Step 2: Acetic acid 4-bromopyridin-2-ylmethyl ester

To a solution of 4-bromo-2-methylpyridine-1-oxide (4.00 g, 21.40 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) is added acetic anhydride (6 mL). The mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour and then heated at reflux overnight. The solvent is removed under vacuum and the crude product is filtered through a silica plug, eluting with DCM to afford the title compound as an orange oil (815 mg).

Step 3: Acetic acid 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-ylmethyl ester

A solution of acetic acid 4-bromopyridin-2-ylmethyl ester (800 mg, 3.49 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) is stirred under nitrogen. Pd(dppf)Cl₂ (85 mg, 3 mol %), potassium acetate (1.03 g, 10.5 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) and bispinacolatodiboron (1.33 g, 5.24 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) are added, and the reaction is heated at 80° C. overnight. The resulting orange suspension is diluted with DCM, filtered through celite and concentrated under vacuum to afford an oil that is used in the next step without further purification.

Step 4: Acetic acid 4-{8-[4-(4-isopropyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-pyridin-2-ylmethyl ester

A suspension of (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-isopropyl-piperazin-1-yl)phenyl]amine (300 mg, 0.723 mmol) and Pd(dppf)Cl₂ (59 mg, 10 mol %) in 4/1 dioxane/water (5 mL) is stirred at rt and potassium carbonate (200 mg, 1.45 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) and acetic acid 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)pyridin-2-ylmethyl ester (300 mg, 1.08 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) are added. The resulting mixture is heated at 85° C. overnight. The resulting solution is partitioned between dichloromethane and water, and the organic layer is concentrated onto silica and purified by column chromatography (98/2 DCM/MeOH) to afford the title compound as a yellow solid. LCMS: Rt=0.78 min (100%), m/z 445 (M+H)⁺.

Step 5: (4-{8-[4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}pyridin-2-yl)methanol

Acetic acid 4-{8-[4-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}pyridin-2-ylmethyl ester is stirred at room temperature overnight in 10 mL of a 1.5 M solution of potassium carbonate in methanol. The pH is then brought to neutral by addition of 10% aqueous citric acid and the mixture is extracted with DCM. Purification by LC using 98/2 DCM/2M NH₃ in MeOH as the eluent provides the title compound as a yellow powder (40.3 mg, 12.5% over 2 steps). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.02 (6H, m), 2.33 (1H, m), 2.60 (4H, br m), 3.10 (4H, br m), 4.65 (2H, d), 5.51 (1H, t), 6.96 (2H, d), 7.84-7.89 (3H, m), 8.11 (1H, s), 8.17 (1H, m), 8.61 (1H, d), 8.73 (1H, m), 10.08 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt=0.78 min (100%), m/z (ESI) 445 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 84: [4-(1-Isopropylpiperidin-4-yl)phenyl]-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 92, using pyrazole-4-boronic acid in step 4. LCMS: Rt 0.89 min (100%) m/z (ESI) 403 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 86: 4-(8-(6-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-ylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)furan-2-carboxamide Step 1: 4-Bromo-furan-2-carboxylic acid amide

To a solution of 4,5-dibromo-furan-2-carboxylic acid (7.79 g, 28.85 mmol) in NH₄OH (100 mL) is added zinc dust (2.29 g, 34.62 mmol) in small portions. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 7 minutes then filtered over celite and washed with water and 2M HCl. The filtrate is acidified to pH 1 using conc. HCl and extracted with ethyl acetate (3×). The organic phase is washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtrated and concentrated in vacuo to give an oil (4.96 g) which solidifies on standing to give a white solid, which is used without further purification.

The solid (4.93 g, 25.81 mmol) is dissolved in thionyl chloride (44.2 mL) and refluxed for 1 hour. After removing the solvent in vacuo the residue is dissolved in dichloromethane (75 mL) and a solution of 0.5 M NH₃ in dioxane (52 mL) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, then 33% aq. NH₃ (5 mL) is added and the reaction stirred for additional 2 hours. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue taken-up with a solution of sat. NaHCO₃. The basic solution is extracted using ethyl acetate (3×), the combined organic layers are dried over MgSO₄ and concentrated in vacuo. Purification by silica gel column chromatography eluting with a mixture of (50:49:1) ethyl acetate:petroleum ether:acetic acid, affords the title compound (1.2 g, 22%).

Step 2: 4-(4,4,5,5-Tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-furan-2-carboxylic acid amide

4-Bromo-furan-2-carboxylic acid amide (1.2 g, 6.32 mmol), bis(pinacolato)diboron (1.76 g, 6.94 mmol), PdCl₂dppf (0.154 g, 189 mol) and KOAc (1.85 g, 18.94 mmol) are suspended in dioxane (20 mL), purged with nitrogen for 5 minutes and then heated at 90° C. overnight. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The aqueous layer is extracted three times with ethyl acetate and the combined organic phases are washed with brine, filtered through MgSO₄ and evaporated. The solid residue is triturated with hexane and dried in vacuo to afford the title compound as a solid (0.984 g, 66%).

Step 3: 4-(8-(6-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-ylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)furan-2-carboxamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using 5-bromo-8-(6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine (60 mg, 0.144 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-furan-2-carboxylic acid amide (59 mg, 0.26 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (42 mg, 0.036 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (0.8 mL, 1.15 mmol) and dioxane (2 mL). After evaporation of the solvent the crude material is purified by silica gel column chromatography using DCM followed by 97.5:2.5 and 95:5 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH). The title compound is obtained as a yellow solid (30 mg, 47%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.05 (6H, d), 2.54-2.59 (4H, m), 2.70-2.74 (1H, m), 3.47 (4H, m), 6.90 (1H, d), 7.60 (1H, br s), 7.91 (1H, s), 7.99 (1H, br s), 8.12 (1H, dd), 8.19 (1H, s), 8.68 (1H, s), 8.75 (1H, s), 8.81 (1H, s), 10.03 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.64 min (98.1%), m/z (APCI) 406 (M+H)⁺. LCMS: Rt 2.74 min (93%), m/z (ES⁺) 448 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 88: 4-(8-(4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)furan-2-carboxamide Step 1: 1-Isopropyl-4-(4-nitro-phenyl)-piperazine

To a solution of 4-fluoronitrobenzene (5 g, 35.4 mmol) in THF (50 mL), 1-isopropylpiperazine (4.54 g, 35.4 mmol) and K₂CO₃ (7.35 g, 53.2 mmol) are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature overnight. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue is partitioned between EtOAc and water. The organic layer is washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated. The crude compound is purified by silica gel column chromatography using 99:1 and 98:2 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to give the title compound (8.2 g, 94%).

Step 2: 4-(4-Isopropyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamine

1-Isopropyl-4-(4-nitro-phenyl)-piperazine (8.3 g, 33.2 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (120 mL) and tin (II) dichloride dihydrate (37.4 g, 0.165 mol) is added. The mixture is cooled using a water bath and conc. HCl is added (36 mL). The reaction is stirred at room temperature overnight. After removing the methanol, the resultant solution is basified using conc. NaOH (pH 11). The water phase is extracted with diethyl ether (3×) and the organic layers combined, dried over MgSO₄, filtered, concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound (6.4 g, 88%).

Step 3 (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-isopropyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 1, using 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (2 g, 7.20 mmol), 4-(4-isopropyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamine (1.89 g, 8.62 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine (1.88 mL, 10.8 mmol) in 2-propanol (30 mL) are stirred at 95° C. overnight. The title compound is isolated after trituration with diethyl ether and petroleum ether as a grey solid (2.59 g, 87%).

Step 4: 4-(8-(4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)furan-2-carboxamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using 5-bromo-N-(6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-amine (80 mg, 0.21 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-furan-2-carboxylic acid amide (101 mg, 0.42 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (62 mg, 0.053 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (aq) (1.143 mL, 1.71 mmol), and dioxane (4 mL). The crude product is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM and 97:3 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH). The title compound is isolated after trituration with diethyl ether (35.4 mg, 42%). Conversion into the mesylate salt using 1M methanesulfonic acid in MeOH (0.0793 mL) affords the title compound as a solid (35 mg).

¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.35 (6H, d), 2.35 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.01 (2H, t), 3.22-3.35 (2H, m), 3.58 (3H, m), 3.88 (2H, d), 7.09 (2H, d), 7.61 (1H, br s), 7.94 (2H, m), 8.00 (1H, br s), 8.22 (1H, s), 8.76 (1H, s), 8.82 (1H, s), 9.27 (1H, br s), 10.02 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.02 min (98.9%), m/z (APCI) 447 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 89: 4-{8-[4-(1-Isopropylpiperidin-4-yl)phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 92, using 2-(aminocarbonyl)thiophene-4-boronic acid in step 4. LCMS: Rt 0.94 min (100%) m/z (ESI) 462 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 90: (4-{8-[6-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-ylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}pyridin-2-yl)methanol

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound 83, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[6-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)pyridin-3-yl]amine in Step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.71 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 446 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 92: 5-{8-[4-(1-Isopropylpiperidin-4-yl)phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one Step 1: 1-Isopropyl-4-(4-nitrophenyl)piperidine

4-(4-Nitrophenyl)piperidine (250 mg, 1.21 mmol), K₂CO₃ (170 mg, 1.21 mmol) and 2-iodopropane (240 μL, 2.4 mmol) are stirred in acetonitrile (3 mL) in a sealed tube at 120° C. for 45 min. The mixture is cooled and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The residue is partitioned between DCM (20 mL) and water (5 mL), the layers are separated and the DCM is washed with water (5 mL) and brine (5 mL) and dried over MgSO₄. Evaporation of the solvent affords the title compound (300 mg) which is used without further purification.

Step 2: 4-(1-Isopropylpiperidin-4-yl)phenylamine

Hydrazine (35% by weight in water, 0.67 mL, 7.2 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (38 mg, 0.03 mmol) are added to a solution of 1-isopropyl-4-(4-nitrophenyl)piperidine (180 mg, 0.72 mmol) in EtOH (10 mL) and the mixture is heated at reflux for 3 h. After cooling, the mixture is filtered through celite and the solvent evaporated. The residue is redissolved in DCM (25 mL), dried over MgSO₄ and the solvent evaporated to afford the desired compound as a pale yellow solid (113 mg, 0.52 mmol) which was used without further purification.

Step 3: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(1-isopropylpiperidin-4-yl)phenyl]amine

N,N-Diisopropylethylamine (200 μL, 1.2 mmol) is added to a mixture of 4-(1-isopropylpiperidin-4-yl)phenylamine (220 mg, 1.0 mmol) and 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (280 mg, 1.0 mmol) in ^(i)PrOH (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 48 h. The mixture is cooled and the solvent evaporated under reduced pressure to afford an orange-brown solid. This is partitioned between DCM (50 mL) and water (20 mL) and the layers are separated. The organic phase is washed with citric acid (10% aq., 3×25 mL). The combined washings are extracted with DCM (25 mL) and then made basic by addition of NaHCO₃ (s). The mixture is extracted with DCM (3×25 mL) and the combined extracts dried over MgSO₄ and evaporated. The crude product was purified by chromatography on silica gel, eluting with 5%-10% MeOH in DCM to afford the desired compound, contaminated with the starting aniline. This was recrystallised from MeOH to afford the pure title compound (110 mg).

This material may be used to prepare 5-{8-[4-(1-isopropylpiperidin-4-yl)phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one in a fashion analogous to step 4 as described for Compound 79.

LCMS: Rt 0.91 min (100%) m/z (ESI) 468 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 100:1-(4-(5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)phenyl)piperazin-2-one Step 1: 4-(4-Amino-phenyl)-3-oxo-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester

A suspension of p-iodo-aniline (918 mg, 4.8 mmol), 3-oxo-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (960 mg, 4.2 mmol) (1R,2R)-cyclohexane-1,2-diamine (0.05 mL, 0.42 mmol), copper (I) iodide (14.9 mg, 0.0042 mmol) and K₂CO₃ (1.19 g, 2.04 mmol) in dioxane (4 mL), is purged with nitrogen for 5 min in a reaction tube. The tube is sealed and the reaction mixture is heated at 119° C. for 15 hours. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture is filtered through a silica cartridge washing with ethyl acetate (40 mL). The filtrate is concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound as a brown liquid (1.06 g, 87%). LCMS: Rt 0.88 min (91%).

Step 2: 1-[4-(5-Bromo-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-phenyl]-piperazin-2-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 1, using 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (0.283 g, 1.00 mmol), 4-(4-amino-phenyl)-3-oxo-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid ter-t-butyl ester (0.300 g, 1.00 mmol) and N-ethyldiisopropyl-amine (0.20 mL, 1.02 mmol) in 2-propanol (1 mL). Purification of the crude material by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM followed by 98:2 DCM:MeOH affords 4-[4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-phenyl]-3-oxo-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester as a white solid (0.252 g, 51%).

A solution of 4-[4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-phenyl]-3-oxo-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (0.252 mg, 0.6 mmol) in 2:1 DCM:TFA (4.8 mL) is stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. The mixture is then diluted with DCM and basified with sat. NaHCO₃. The aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×) and the organic layers are combined, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to afford the title compound as a solid (180 mg, 78%).

Step 3: 1-(4-(5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)phenyl)piperazin-2-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 1, step 5 using 1-[4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-phenyl]-piperazin-2-one (70 mg, 0.18 mmol) 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-1,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (64 mg, 0.33 mmol), Pd(PPh₃)₄ (21 mg, 18 μmol) and NaO^(t)Bu (70 mg, 0.72 mmol) in 2 mL of 3:1 DMF/water. The reaction mixture is concentrated under vacuum and the residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with a gradient 99:1 to 90:10 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH). The title compound is isolated as a pale green solid (13 mg, 19%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.05 (2H, m), 3.42 (2H, s), 3.62 (2H, m), 7.32 (2H, d), 8.07 (2H, d), 8.26 (1H, s), 8.39 (1H, br s), 8.67 (1H, br s), 8.81 (1H, s), 10.05 (1H, s), 13.32 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 6.98 min (92.4%), m/z (APCI) 376 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 102: 5-{8-[4-(4-tert-Butyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one Step 1: 1-tert-Butyl-4-(4-nitro-phenyl)-piperazine

To a solution of 1-fluoro-4-nitro-benzene (314 mg, 2.23 mmol) and 4-tert-butyl-piperazine (1 g, 3.34 mmol) in dioxane (15 mL) is added K₂CO₃ (1.65 mg, 11.9 mmol) and the reaction is stirred at 130° C. overnight. The solvent is evaporated under vacuum and the residue is partitioned between ethyl acetate and water. The organic layer is washed with brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated to give a crude compound. Purification by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM followed by 99:1 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) affords the title compound (348 mg, 55.4%). LCMS: Rt 3.87 min (99%).

Step 2: 4-(4-tert-Butyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamine

1-tert-Butyl-4-(4-nitro-phenyl)-piperazine (348 mg, 1.32 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (10 mL) and tin (II) dichloride dihydrate (1.08 g, 4.79 mmol) is added. The mixture is cooled using a water bath and conc. HCl is added (3 mL). The reaction is stirred at 40° C. overnight. After removing the methanol, the resultant solution is basified using conc. NaOH (pH 11). The water phase is extracted with diethyl ether (3×) and the organic layers combined, dried over MgSO₄, filtered, concentrated in vacuo to afford the title compound (308 mg, 99%) which is used in the next step without further purification. LCMS: Rt 2.16 min (87%)

Step 3: (5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-tert-butyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 1, using 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (0.308 g, 1.107 mmol), 4-(4-tert-butyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamine (0.310 g, 1.33 mmol) and N-ethyldiisopropyl-amine (0.289 mL, 1.66 mmol) in 2-propanol (5 mL). The reaction mixture is partitioned between DCM and 1N NaOH, the organic layer is separated and washed with water and brine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated under vacuum. Trituration of the residue with diethyl ether and petroleum ether affords the title compound (440 mg, 92%) as a cream solid. LCMS: Rt 2.25 min (96%).

Step 4: 5-{8-[4-(4-tert-Butyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-tert-butyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amine (100 mg, 0.232 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one (90 mg, 0.32 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (67 mg, 0.058 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (aq) (1.24 mL), and dioxane (3.7 mL). The reaction mixture is partitioned between ethyl acetate and brine, the organic layer is separated, dried over MgSO₄ filtered and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with 98:2 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) followed by 95:5 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to give a solid which is triturated with diethyl ether and petroleum ether to afford the title compound (71 mg, 63%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.43 (9H, s), 2.36 (3H, s, MsOH), 3.02 (2H, m), 3.19-3.26 (2H, m), 3.67 (2H, d), 3.90 (2H, d), 4.52 (2H, s), 7.10 (2H, d), 7.86 (1H, d), 7.96-8.01 (3H, m), 8.10 (1H, d), 8.24 (1H, s), 8.72 (1H, s), 8.75 (1H, s), 9.09 (1H, br s), 10.09 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 2.07 min (99%), m/z (APCI) 483 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 105: 5-{8-[4-(2-Oxo-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one Step 1: 3-Oxo-4-{4-[5-(1-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-isoindol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-phenyl}-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using 4-[4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-phenyl]-3-oxo-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (115 mg, 0.24 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one (92 mg, 0.35 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (83 mg, 0.072 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (aq) (1.3 mL, 1.92 mmol), and dioxane (2.5 mL). The reaction mixture is diluted with brine then toluene is added and a precipitate is formed and collected by filtration. The resultant solid is dissolved in DCM and filtered through a silica cartridge to afford the title compound as a yellow solid (60 mg, 47%).

Step 2: 5-{8-[4-(2-Oxo-piperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one

A solution of 3-oxo-4-{4-[5-(1-oxo-2,3-dihydro-1H-isoindol-5-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-phenyl}-piperazine-1-carboxylic acid tert-butyl ester (59 mg, 0.1 mmol) in 3:1 DCM:TFA (1.2 mL) is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The reaction mixture is diluted with DCM and basified with sat. NaHCO₃. The aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×) and the organic layers are combined, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and concentrated under vacuum to afford the title compound as a yellow solid (38 mg, 86%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 3.07 (2H, m), 3.44 (2H, s), 3.64 (2H, m), 4.50 (2H, s), 7.32 (2H, d), 7.83 (1H, d), 8.04-8.10 (4H, m), 8.22 (1H, s), 8.70 (1H, br s), 8.74 (1H, s), 10.25 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 7.17 min (93.7%), m/z (APCI) 441 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 108: 7-Fluoro-5-{8-[4-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one Step 1: 4-Bromo-2,6-difluorobenzoic acid methyl ester

To a suspension of 4-Bromo-2,6-difluoro-benzoic acid (5 g, 21 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is added thionyl chloride (15 mL) and DMF (0.5 mL). The mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2.5 h. It is then cooled to 0° C. and MeOH (20 mL) is added carefully causing vigorous HCl evolution. After stirring for an additional 0.5 h, the clear solution is partitioned between DCM (50 mL) and water (50 mL). The organic layer is washed with saturated NaHCO₃, brine, dried over MgSO₄ and the solvent is removed under vacuum to afford the title compound as a pale yellow oil which is used without further purification.

Step 2: 4-Bromo-2-fluoro-6-(nitromethyl)benzoic acid methyl ester

Nitromethane (10 mL, 169 mmol, 8 equiv.) is added cautiously to a suspension of sodium hydride (4.05 g, 169 mmol, 8 equiv.) and MgSO₄ (40 g) in DMSO (100 mL) at rt and the resulting slurry is stirred for 0.25 h. To the resulting yellow slurry is added 4-bromo-2,6-difluorobenzoic acid methyl ester (5.3 g, 21 mmol) and the mixture is stirred at rt for 3 days at which point all the starting material has been consumed. Water (200 mL) and 6M HCl (50 mL) is added followed by DCM (200 mL). More water (500 mL) is added to yield a clear biphasic system. The aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×100 mL), the DCM layers are then combined, washed with saturated NaHCO₃ and brine, and dried over MgSO₄. Evaporation of the solvent affords an orange solid containing 64% of the desired material, used without further purification. LCMS; Rt=1.27 min (64%).

Step 3: 5-Bromo-7-fluoro-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one

Crude 4-bromo-2-fluoro-6-(nitromethyl)benzoic acid methyl ester from the previous step is dissolved in MeOH (100 mL). To this clear orange solution is added Zinc dust (3.35 g, 51.3 mmol, 3 equiv.) followed by ammonium formate (3.23 g, 51.3 mmol, 3 equiv.) which results in an exothermic reaction. After 0.3 h, 7M NH₃ in MeOH (50 mL) is added and the mixture is stirred overnight at room temperature. The resulting mixture is filtered through celite, and the yellow filtrate is adsorbed on silica and roughly cleaned by LC using 94/6 DCM/MeOH 7M NH₃. Removal of the solvent affords a tan solid that is redissolved in DCM, washed with 10% NaOH, and concentrated under reduced pressure to leave a white solid, which is triturated further with small amounts of DCM to afford the title compound. LCMS: Rt 0.96 min (100%) m/z 230/232 (M+H)⁺.

Step 4: 7-Fluoro-5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one

A solution of 5-bromo-7-fluoro-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one (531 mg, 2.31 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) is stirred under nitrogen. Pd(dppf)Cl₂ (94 mg, 5 mol %), potassium acetate (453 mg, 4.62 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) and bispinacolatodiboron (1.17 g, 4.62 mmol, 2 equiv.) are added, and the reaction is heated at 80° C. for 3 h. The resulting orange suspension is diluted with DCM, filtered through celite and concentrated under vacuum to afford an oil that is redissolved in a minimum of DCM. Diethyl ether is slowly added to afford the title compound as a tan solid. LCMS: Rt 1.18 min (100%) m/z 277/279 (M+H)⁺.

Step 5: 7-Fluoro-5-{8-[4-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 91 using the above boronate. LCMS: Rt=0.90 min (95%), m/z 487 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 112: 5-(8-(4-(4-Isopropyl-2-oxopiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)isoindolin-1-one Step 1: 1-[4-(5-Bromo-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-phenyl]-4-isopropyl-piperazin-2-one

To a solution of 1-[4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-phenyl]-piperazin-2-one (example 31, step 2) (180 mg, 0.47 mmol) in MeOH (4 mL) are added acetic acid (0.03 mL, 0.47 mmol), NaOAc (38 mg, 0.47 mmol) and acetone (0.2 mL, 1.18 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 1 hour then NaCNBH₃ (60 mg, 0.94 mmol) is added and the mixture is stirred at 40° C. overnight. After cooling to room temperature, the reaction mixture is acidified with conc. HCl (pH 1) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is partitioned between 6N NaOH and DCM. The aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×) and the combined organic layers are dried over MgSO₄ and concentrated in vacuo to afford a crude compound which is purified by silica gel column chromatography. Elution with DCM and 98:2 DCM:MeOH affords the title compound as a yellow solid (45 mg, 25%).

Step 2: 5-(8-(4-(4-Isopropyl-2-oxopiperazin-1-yl)phenylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl)isoindolin-1-one

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4, using 1-[4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-phenyl]-4-isopropyl-piperazin-2-one (40 mg, 0.09 mmol), 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one (37 mg, 0.14 mmol), and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (31 mg, 0.027 mmol) in 1.5M Na₂CO₃ (aq) (0.5 mL, 0.75 mmol), and dioxane (1.2 mL). The reaction mixture is diluted with brine then toluene is added and a precipitate is formed and collected by filtration. The filtrate is washed with diethyl ether, petroleum ether and MeOH and then purified by silica gel column chromatography. Elution with 99:1 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) followed by 98:2 and 95:5 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) affords the title compound as a yellow solid (24 mg, 55%). ¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 1.08 (6H, d), 2.73-2.87 (3H, m), 3.27 (2H, s), 3.62-3.68 (2H, m), 4.52 (2H, s), 7.36 (2H, d), 7.84 (1H, d), 8.07-8.10 (4H, m), 8.25 (1H, s), 8.70 (1H, br s), 8.77 (1H, s), 10.28 (1H, s). LCMS: Rt 1.94 min (95.2%), m/z (APCI) 483 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 114: 5-{8-[4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-3,3-dimethyl-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one Step 1: 5-Bromo-2-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3,3-dimethyl-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one

A suspension of sodium hydride (130 mg, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 3.2 mmol) and tetra-^(n)butylammonium iodide (243 mg, 0.68 mmol) in THF (20 mL) is stirred at rt and a solution of 5-bromo-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one (675 mg, 3.2 mmol) in THF (20 mL) and DMF (4 mL) is added. After 75 min 4-methoxybenzyl bromide (460 μL, 3.2 mmol) is added and stirring is continued for 4 h. Sodium hydride (635 mg, 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 15.9 mmol) is then added and stirring is continued for 30 min before iodomethane (1.19 mL, 19 mmol) is added and the mixture heated to 70° C. for 30 min. After cooling, NH₄Cl (sat. aq.) is added and the mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate (120 mL). The layers are separated, the organic phase is dried over MgSO₄ and the solvents removed under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by silica chromatography, eluting with 5% to 10% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether to afford the title compound as a yellow oil (640 mg, 1.78 mmol).

Step 2: 5-Bromo-3,3-dimethyl-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one

A solution of 5-bromo-2-(4-methoxybenzyl)-3,3-dimethyl-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one (640 mg, 1.78 mmol) and ceric ammonium nitrate (2.91 g, 5.33 mmol) in acetonitrile (11 mL) and water (5 mL) is stirred at 0° C. for 45 min. The solution is diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL) and washed with brine (40 mL). The organic solvents are dried over MgSO₄ and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by silica chromatography, eluting with 10% to 50% ethyl acetate in petroleum ether to afford the title compound (367 mg, 1.53 mmol).

Step 3: 5-{8-[4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-3,3-dimethyl-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one

5-Bromo-3,3-dimethyl-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one is converted to the corresponding boronate in a fashion analogous to Intermediate 6, Step 3. This is then used to prepare the title compound from (5-bromo[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]amine using methods as described for Compound 120, Step 4. LCMS: Rt=0.92 (100%), m/z=497 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 118: 4-(5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-N-(pyridin-3-ylmethyl)benzamide Step 1: 4-(5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-benzoic acid methyl ester

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 1 using 5,8-dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (250 mg, 0.90 mmol), 4-aminobenzoic methyl ester (163 mg, 1.08 mmol) and N-ethyldiisopropyl-amine (0.19 mL, 1.08 mmol) in 2-propanol (2.5 mL). The title compound is obtained after trituration with 2-propanol as a brown solid (148 mg, 47%).

Step 2: 4-(5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-benzoic acid

4-(5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-benzoic acid methyl ester (460 mg, 1.32 mmol) is suspended in THF (1 mL) and a solution of lithium hydroxide monohydrate (554 mg, 13.2 mmol) in water (11 mL) is added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 4 hours then methanol (11 mL) is added and the mixture is stirred at 50° C. for 24 hours. The mixture is partitioned between water and DCM, the aqueous phase is acidified with 2M HCl (pH 2) and a yellow precipitate is formed. The precipitate is collected by filtration, washed with water and diethyl ether and dried to afford the title compound (215 mg, 49%).

Step 3: 4-(5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-N-pyridin-3-ylmethyl-benzamide

A solution of 4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-benzoic acid (0.230 g, 0.69 mmol), 3-hydroxybenzotriazole (0.103 g, 0.76 mmol), 1-ethyl-3-(3′-dimethylaminopropyl)carbodiimide hydrate (0.146 g, 0.76 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) and 3-picolylamine (0.077 mL, 0.76 mmol) is stirred at room temperature for 21 hours. The solvent is removed in vacuo and the residue is triturated with diethyl ether, ethyl acetate and dichloromethane. A pale yellow solid is obtained, washed with water and dried to afford the title compound (241 mg, 82%).

Step 4: 4-(5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-N-(pyridin-3-ylmethyl)benzamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using 4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-N-pyridin-3-ylmethyl-benzamide (100 mg, 0.24 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (93 mg, 0.48 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (70 mg, 0.06 mmol) in 1.5M K₂CO₃ (aq) (1.4 mL) and dioxane (2.5 mL). The crude material is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM followed by 98:2 then 96:4 then 90:10 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to afford the title compound as a white solid (19.6 mg, 20%).

¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 4.52 (2H, d), 7.40 (1H, m), 7.78 (1H, d), 7.93 (2H, d), 8.18 (2H, d), 8.32 (1H, s), 8.48-8.62 (4H, m), 8.82 (1H, s), 9.01 (1H, t), 10.21 (1H, br s), 13.3 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 1.86 min (93%), m/z (ES⁺) 412 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 119: 4-(5-(2-Oxo-1,2-dihydropyridin-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-N-(pyridin-3-ylmethyl)benzamide Step 1: 4-[5-(2-Methoxy-pyridin-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-N-pyridin-3-ylmethyl-benzamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 6, step 4 using 4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-N-pyridin-3-ylmethyl-benzamide (120 mg, 0.28 mmol), 2-methoxypyridine-4-boronic acid (87 mg, 0.57 mmol) and Pd(PPh₃)₄ (81 mg, 0.07 mmol) in 1.5M K₂CO₃ (aq) (1.6 mL) and dioxane (2.9 mL). The crude material is purified by silica gel column chromatography eluting with DCM followed by 99:1 then 97:3 then 95:5 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH) to afford the title compound as a white solid (92.6 mg, 73%).

Step 2: 4-(5-(2-Oxo-1,2-dihydropyridin-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-N-(pyridin-3-ylmethyl)benzamide

A mixture of 4-[5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-N-pyridin-3-ylmethyl-benzamide (71.5 mg, 0.16 mmol) and pyridinium hydrochloride (91 mg, 0.79 mmol) in water (0.5 mL) in a sealed tube is heated at 150° C. for 25 minutes. After this time the solvent is removed in vacuo. The residue is chromatographed on silica gel, eluting with DCM followed by 98:2 and 90:10 DCM:NH₃ (7M in MeOH), and the fractions containing the desired product are combined and evaporated. The title compound is isolated as a yellow solid (34.5 mg, 49%).

¹H-NMR (400 MHz, d₆-DMSO) δ (ppm) 4.52 (2H, d), 6.82 (1H, m), 7.22 (1H, s), 7.38 (1H, m), 7.51 (1H, d), 7.78 (2H, d), 8.18-8.23 (3H, m), 8.51 (1H, d), 8.62 (1H, s), 8.82 (1H, s), 9.01 (1H, t), 10.58 (1H, br s), 11.8 (1H, br s). LCMS: Rt 1.72 min (97%), m/z (ES⁺) 439 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 120: 2-Methoxy-N-(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)methyl-4-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-benzamide Step 1: 2-Methoxy-N-(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)methyl-4-nitrobenzamide

2-Methoxy-4-nitrobenzoic acid (293 mg, 1.49 mmol) is dissolved in DMF (2 mL) and 4-methylmorpholine (220 mL, 3.0 mmol) and TBTU (1.79 g, 1.7 mmol) are added. The mixture is stirred at rt for 30 min and C-(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)methylamine (400 mg, 3.27 mmol) is added. Stirring is continued at rt for 12 h. DCM (10 mL) is added and the organic phase is washed with Na₂CO₃ (5% aq.), HCl (3% aq.) and water, and then dried over Na₂SO₄. After evaporation of the solvents, the residue is triturated with ether-hexane to afford the title compound as a white solid.

Step 2: 4-Amino-2-methoxy-N-[(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)methyl]benzamide

A solution of 2-methoxy-N-(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)methyl-4-nitrobenzamide (448 mg, 1.49 mmol) in EtOH and EtOAc (8 mL each) is stirred and ammonium formate (375 mg, 6 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (100 mg) are added. The mixture is heated at reflux for 20 min, cooled, filtered through celite, the solid is washed with EtOH and the combined solvents are evaporated to afford the title compound.

Step 3: 4-(5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-2-hydroxy-N-[(6-methyl-pyridin-3-yl)methyl]benzamide

5,8-Dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (285 mg, 1.03 mmol) and 4-amino-2-methoxy-N-[(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)methyl]benzamide (280 mg, 1.03 mmol) are stirred in ^(i)PrOH (5 mL) and HBr (48% aq., 380 μL) is added. The mixture is heated at reflux for 24 hours. The cooled suspension is poured into NaHCO₃ (sat. aq., 25 mL) and water (25 mL) and extracted with CHCl₃ (4×30 mL). The extracts are dried over MgSO₄ and evaporated. The residue is purified by column chromatography, eluting with 10% CH₂Cl₂/MeOH. The product-containing fractions are evaporated and the residue is triturated with MeOH to afford the title compound as a brown solid.

Step 4: 2-Methoxy-N-(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)methyl-4-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-benzamide

Pyrazole-4-boronic acid (19 mg, 0.17 mmol), 4-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-2-hydroxy-N-[(6-methyl-pyridin-3-yl)methyl]benzamide (40 mg, 0.085 mmol), K₂CO₃ (24 mg, 0.17 mmol) and Pd(dppf)Cl₂CH₂Cl₂ (4 mg, 0.005 mmol) are weighed into a sealable tube. The tube is flushed with nitrogen and dioxane-water (4:1, 4 mL) is added. The tube is sealed, placed in an ultrasonic bath under a flow of nitrogen gas for 30 seconds and then placed into an oil bath at 85° C. The reaction is stirred for 28 hours, adding additional portions of boronic acid (10 mg) and catalyst (2 mg) after 2 h and 18 h. The crude mixture is absorbed onto SiO₂ and purified by column chromatography, eluting with 1%-10% MeOH/DCM. The product obtained is redissolved in MeOH/DCM (4:1, 10 mL) and 0.1 M MsOH/MeOH (2 eq) is added, the solvents evaporated and the residue taken up in water and lyophillised to afford the title compound as its bis-mesylate salt (38 mg). LCMS: Rt 0.92 min (93.9%) m/z (ESI) 455 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 122: N-Benzyl-2-methoxy-4-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]-benzamide

This compound may be prepared using the methods described for Compound 120, using benzylamine in step 1. LCMS: Rt 1.62 min (100%) m/z (ESI) 440 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 124: N-Pyridin-2-ylmethyl 3-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]benzamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 129 using 2-pyridylmethylamine in step 5. LCMS: Rt=0.84 min (100%), m/z (ESI) 412 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 127: (4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-{3-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]phenyl}methanone

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 129, using 4-isopropylpiperazine in step 5. LCMS: Rt=0.84 min (100%), m/z (ESI) 432 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 129: N-Ethyl 3-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]benzamide Step 1: 3-(5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)benzoic acid ethyl ester

5,8-Dibromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazine (1.39 g, 5.00 mmol) and ethyl 3-aminobenzoate (0.93 g, 5.60 mmol) are stirred in PrOH (10 mL) and HBr (48% aq., 1.14 mL, 10 mmol) is added. The mixture is heated at 85° C. for 4 h and then cooled to rt and quenched with NaHCO₃ (sat. aq., 25 mL). The resulting suspension is cooled to 0° C. and the white solid is collected by suction filtration and washed with water (10 mL). The crude product is taken up in EtOH and the solvent evaporated to afford the title compound as an off-white solid (1.79 g, 4.9 mmol) which is used without further purification.

Step 2: 3-[(5-Bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-tert-butoxycarbonyl-amino]benzoic acid ethyl ester

A solution of 3-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)benzoic acid ethyl ester (1.79 g, 4.93 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) is stirred under N₂ at rt and BOC₂O (1.34 g, 6.16 mmol) and DMAP (0.30 g, 2.46 mmol) are added. Stirring is continued for 2 h, when LCMS indicates complete conversion of the starting material. The mixture is filtered and the filtrate is washed with dilute citric acid (pH 6, 5 mL) and brine (5 mL) and dried over Na₂SO₄. Evaporation of the solvent affords the title compound as a yellow oil (1.87 g, 4.0 mmol) which is used without further purification.

Step 3: 3-{tert-Butoxycarbonyl-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-amino}benzoic acid ethyl ester

Nitrogen is bubbled through a mixture of 3-[(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-tert-butoxycarbonyl-amino]benzoic acid ethyl ester (0.58 g, 1.25 mmol), 4-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole (0.49 g, 2.50 mmol), K₂CO₃ (0.35 g, 2.50 mmol) and Pd(dppf)Cl₂DCM (102 mg, 0.125 mmol) in dioxane (37.5 mL) and water (9.6 mL). A condenser is fitted to the flask, the system is evacuated and purged with N₂ (g) and then heated at 115° C. for 25 min. The heating bath is removed and CO₂ (s) is added to cool and buffer the system. The solvent is removed under reduced pressure and the residue is purified by silica chromatography, eluting with 10% to 50% ethyl acetate in DCM, to afford the title compound as an orange oil (0.61 g, >100%) which is used without further purification.

Step 4: 3-{tert-Butoxycarbonyl-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1, 2, 4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-amino}benzoic acid

Impure 3-{tert-butoxycarbonyl-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-amino}benzoic acid ethyl ester (0.61 g, 1.25 mmol) is dissolved in THF (2.5 mL) and KOH (2M aq., 2.5 mL, 5 mmol) is added and the mixture is heated at 60° C. overnight. The solution is cooled and filtered through celite, rinsing with water. The filtrate is poured into citric acid (2M aq., 2.5 mL) and stirred at 0° C. The resulting solid is collected by suction filtration, washing with water and dried by suspending in EtOH and evaporation under reduced pressure, to afford a brown gum (280 mg).

Further product is obtained by extraction of the filtrate with DCM, to afford a combined total of 352 mg of the title compound. This is used without further purification.

Step 5: N-Ethyl 3-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]benzamide

3-{tert-Butoxycarbonyl-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]-amino}benzoic acid (42 mg, 0.10 mmol), ethylamine (12 M aq., 42 μL, 0.50 mmol), and triethylamine (28 μL, 0.20 mmol) are stirred in DMF (0.30 mL) and PyBOP (57 mg, 0.11 mmol) is added. Stirring is continued overnight. The reaction mixture is partitioned between EtOAc (7 mL) and NaHCO₃ (sat. aq., 7 mL) and the layers are separated. The combined organic layers are washed with brine (2×5 mL) and dried over Na₂SO₄. Evaporation of the solvent affords an oil which is dissolved in MeOH (0.3 mL) containing HCl (12 M aq., 0.15 mL) and stirred overnight. Triethylamine (0.25 mL) and EtOH (2 mL) are added and the solvents removed under reduced pressure. The residue is purified by preparative HPLC to afford the title compound as a white solid (7 mg). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d6, 400 MHz): δ=13.29 ppm (s, 0.8H); 10.01 (s, 0.9H); 8.77 (s, 1.0H); 8.65 (s, 1.0H); 8.52 (s, 1.1H); 8.41-8.37 (m, 2.1H); 8.25 (s, 1.0H); 8.08 (d, 1.0H); 7.47 (d, 1.0H); 7.41 (t, 1.1H); 7.04-7.03 (m, 0.5H); 3.32 (s, 29.2H (water)); 1.14 (t, 3.5H). LCMS: Rt=0.95 min (100%), m/z (ESI) 349 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 131: N-(4-Hydroxybenzyl) 3-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]benzamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 129, using 4-hydroxybenzylamine in step 5. LCMS: Rt=0.98 min (100%), m/z (ESI) 427 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 134: N-Benzyl-N-methyl 3-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]benzamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 129, using N-methylbenzylamine in step 5. LCMS: Rt=1.15 min (100%), m/z (ESI) 425 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 167: 4-[8-(6-Phenylacetylamino-pyridin-3-ylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide Step 1: N-(5-Nitropyridin-2-yl)-2-phenylacetamide

A solution of 2-amino-5-nitropyridine (4.17 g, 30 mmol) in pyridine (30 mL) is stirred at rt and a solution of phenylacetyl chloride (4.64 g, 30 mmol) in THF (30 mL) is added dropwise. The mixture is stirred for 24 h and then poured into ice-water (250 mL) to afford a brown solid, which is used without further purification.

This material is used to prepare N-[5-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-pyridin-2-yl]-2-phenylacetamide in a fashion analogous to steps 2 and 3 of the methods as described for Compound 120.

Step 4: 4-[8-(6-Phenylacetylamino-pyridin-3-ylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-thiophene-2-carboxylic acid amide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 120, step 4, using N-[5-(5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino)-pyridin-2-yl]-2-phenylacetamide and 2-(aminocarbonyl)thiophene-4-boronic acid. LCMS: Rt 1.06 min (100%) m/z (ESI) 471 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 169: 2-(4-{4-[5-(1H-Pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-ylamino]phenyl}-piperidin-1-yl)acetamide

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 84, using 2-bromoacetamide in step 1. LCMS: Rt=0.81 min (100%), m/z (ESI) 418 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 170: 5-{8-[4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-3-trifluoromethylphenylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one

This compound may be prepared using the methods as described for Compound GB15, using 5-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborolan-2-yl)-2,3-dihydroisoindol-1-one. LCMS: Rt=0.99 min (95%), m/z (ESI) 537 (M+H)⁺.

Compound 171: [4-(4-Isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-3-trifluoromethylphenyl]-[5-(1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl]amine

This compound may be prepared using methods as described for Compound 46, using (5-bromo-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-8-yl)-[4-(4-isopropylpiperazin-1-yl)-3-trifluoromethylphenyl]amine. LCMS: Rt=0.99 (95%), m/z (ESI) 472 (M+H)⁺.

Other examples of compounds of the invention, prepared by the above procedures are described hereinabove.

Purification Conditions and Characterization

Routinely, post-synthesis all compounds may be purified using reverse phase HPLC using a Gilson preparative HPLC system (322 pump, 155 UV/VIS detector, 215 liquid handler). The Gilson 215 acts as both auto-sampler and fraction collector. Compounds can also be purified by flash chromatography on silica gel.

Compounds are characterised by mass spectrometry using single quadrupole instrumentation with an electrospray source.

Biological Assays Demonstrating the Usefulness of the Compounds EXAMPLE 1 MAPKAP-K5 Assay

MAPKAP-K5 reactions are performed in FlashPlate format using 0.1 or 0.2 μCi 33P-ATP; 0.6 μM ATP; 1 mU MAPKAP-K5; 3 μM MAPKAP-K5 peptide substrate, incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes.

Flashplate Assay:

The MAPKAP-K5 kinase reaction is performed in a 384 well polypropylene plate (Matrix Technologies) and then transferred to a streptavidin-coated 384 well flashplate (Perkin-Elmer).

To wells containing 2 μL test compound or standard inhibitor, 13 μL Enzyme mix or diluent are added using a Hydra (Robbins Scientific).

Reactions are started by addition of 10 μL of [2,5×] substrate cocktail using a Multidrop (Thermo-Labsystems), to give final concentrations in the assay of:

1 mU MAPKAP-K5

3M MAPKAP-K5 peptide substrate

0.6 μM ATP

0.004 μCi [33P]-γ-ATP/μL

1× reaction buffer

Plates are incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes.

Reactions are terminated by the addition of 25 μL EDTA (50 mM) to each well using a Micro-fill (Biotek).

Reactions are transferred to a streptavidin-coated flashplate using a Zymark robotic system. Plates are incubated for 60 minutes at room temperature.

All wells are washed 3 times with 100 μl phosphate buffered saline using a Tecan plate washer.

Radioactivity is determined by scintillation counting of the flashplate (empty wells) on a Packard TopCount.

Enzyme Mix:

-   -   Enzyme     -   50 mM Tris Hcl (pH 7.5)     -   0.1 mM EGTA     -   2 mM DTT     -   1 mg/mL BSA

Reaction Buffer:

-   -   50 mM Tris Hcl (pH 7.5)     -   0.1 mM EGTA     -   10 mM Magnesium acetate     -   2 mM DTT

The following compounds have been or can be prepared according to the synthetic methods described above. For the purpose of Table 1 and Table 2 below, activity of each compound, which can be determined using the MAPKAPK5 assay method described in Example 1, is expressed as follows:

++++ compound exhibited MAPKAPK5 IC₅₀ 1-100 nM

+++ compound exhibited MAPKAPK5 IC₅₀ 101-500 nM

++ compound exhibited MAPKAPK5 IC₅₀ 501-1000 nM

+ compound exhibited MAPKAPK5 IC₅₀>1000 nM

TABLE 1 Structure and activity of of Exemplary Compounds MAPKAPK5 ID STRUCTUE MW(calcd) MW(obsd) IC50 (nM) 1

362.40 ++ 2

375.44 + 3

428.50 + 4

402.46 + 5

415.46 + 6

434.53 ++++ 7

446.49 + 8

446.49 + 9

434.53 ++ 10

433.45 + 11

433.45 + 12

376.42 ++ 13

421.48 + 14

451.44 = 15

421.48 +++ 16

389.47 + 17

380.39 + 18

396.84 = 19

405.42 + 20

406.45 + 21

465.54 ++ 22

465.54 + 23

362.40 + 24

449.54 ++ 25

430.40 + 26

492.54 = 27

420.50 +++ 28

462.58 ++++ 29

405.42 + 30

446.52 + 31

403.49 +++ 32

462.58 +++ 33

427.47 +++ 34

405.42 +++ 35

441.50 + 36

468.57 ++++ 37

392.42 + 38

403.49 ++ 39

441.50 + 40

361.41 ++ 41

363.38 + 42

416.49 + 43

404.48 + 44

444.43 + 45

443.44 + 46

415.50 + 47

422.47 +++ 48

428.52 + 49

469.62 + 50

378.46 + 51

419.56 + 52

390.45 + 53

477.51 + 54

475.58 +++ 55

463.57 +++ 56

503.51 ++ 57

502.52 +++ 58

474.59 +++ 59

401.48 + 60

402.47 + 61

422.47 + 62

463.57 ++ 63

501.54 + 64

442.45 + 65

471.52 +++ 66

429.51 + 67

380.39 + 68

396.84 + 69

420.50 + 70

392.42 + 71

468.52 + 72

414.43 + 73

436.50 + 74

477.60 + 75

445.46 + 76

461.91 + 77

503.01 +++ 78

389.42 + 79

469.55 ++++ 80

471.54 + 81

512.64 + 82

403.45 + 83

444.54 + 84

402.51 ++ 85

470.56 + 86

447.56 ++++ 87

428.46 ++++ 88

446.52 ++++ 89

461.59 ++++ 90

445.53 + 91

446.53 + 92

467.58 ++++ 93

412.46 + 94

406.41 ++++ 95

476.61 + 96

477.60 + 97

468.57 + 98

469.55 + 99

429.44 +++ 100

375.40 + 101

470.54 +++ 102

482.59 ++++ 103

417.52 ++ 104

412.46 + 105

440.47 ++++ 106

453.55 + 107

470.58 + 108

486.56 ++++ 109

468.57 + 110

405.47 + 111

417.43 +++ 112

482.55 +++ 113

433.50 ++ 114

496.62 + 115

348.41 +++ 116

350.38 + 117

360.35 + 168

332.33 + 169

417.48 ++ 170

536.56 +++ 171

471.49 + 172

403.49 + 173

469.55 + 174

378.34 + 175

484.57 +++ 176

372.39 +++ 177

375.40 + 178

449.52 ++ 179

470.54 +++ 180

503.01 ++++ 181

334.38 +++ 182

320.36 +++ 183

460.54 ++++ 184

362.44 +++ 185

349.40 + 186

391.48 + 187

417.52 + 188

482.59 ++++ 189

483.58 ++++ 190

469.55 +++

TABLE 2 Structure and activity of Exemplary Benzamide Compounds Patent MW MW MAPKAPK5 ID MOLSTRUCTURE (calcd) (obsd) IC₅₀ (nM) 118

411.43 + 119

438.45 + 120

455.48 + 121

514.57 + 122

440.47 + 123

410.44 + 124

411.43 + 125

376.42 + 126

374.41 + 127

431.50 ++ 128

320.32 + 129

348.37 + 130

416.49 + 131

426.44 + 132

499.56 + 133

456.49 + 134

424.47 + 135

397.40 + 136

445.49 ++ 137

425.46 ++ 138

417.48 ++ 139

431.50 ++ 140

372.39 ++ 141

461.53 ++ 142

374.41 + 143

445.49 ++ 144

497.54 ++ 145

465.52 ++ 146

418.46 + 147

479.55 +++ 148

466.51 ++ 149

406.45 + 150

447.50 ++ 151

440.47 + 152

445.53 ++ 153

494.56 ++ 154

496.53 + 155

488.56 ++ 156

392.42 + 157

406.45 + 158

404.43 ++ 159

386.42 ++ 160

394.46 ++ 161

434.46 ++ 162

447.55 ++ 163

431.50 +++ 164

376.42 + 165

471.57 + 166

364.37 ++ 167

470.52 ++ 191

479.55 + 192

477.49 + 193

547.58 + 194

482.51 + 195

544.62 +++ 196

544.62 +++ 197

542.56 + 198

476.50 +

EXAMPLE 2 Development of an Assay for the Identification of Regulators of the Expression of MMP1 by Activated Primary Synovial Fibroblasts

To identify compounds that decrease the ECM-degrading activity of cells, the ECM-degrading activity of cells may be induced to allow proper detection of this activity, and to achieve a clearer read-out. In the context of RA, the cells of choice are mammalian synovial fibroblasts and the triggers that may be used to induce the ECM-degrading activity are cytokines relevant in the field of arthritis: for instance TNF-α, IL1β, IL6, OSM, IL17, and MIF1-α. This list is not comprehensive due to the plethora of cytokines potentially involved in the RA pathogenesis (Smolen and Steiner, 2003). To set up an in vitro assay that is as close as possible to the complexity of the pathology, the trigger applied should be a mixture of factors generated by contacting cytokine-producing cells relevant in the field of arthritis, such as monocytes, macrophages, T-cells, and B-cells, with a trigger. The cytokine-producing cells will respond to the contact by producing a complex and unbiased mixture of factors. If the cytokine-producing cell used is also found in a pannus, and the cytokine applied to produce this trigger is found in the synovial fluid of rheumatoid arthritis patients, the mixture of factors ultimately produced will contain part of the factors that are present in the joints of arthritis patients.

Principle of the ‘MMP Assay’

Matrix Metallo Proteases (MMPs) possess various physiological roles, as e.g. the maturation of other proteases, growth factors, and the degradation of extra-cellular matrix components. MMP1 is one of the members of the MMP family that is able to degrade native collagen, the main component of bone and cartilage. An increased expression of MMP1 by synovial fibroblasts (SFs) is diagnostic for the progression of the arthritic disease and is predictive for erosive processes in the joint (Cunnane et al., 2001). The expression of MMP1 by SFs can be increased by the activation of SFs with triggers relevant for rheumatoid arthritis, as cytokines like TNF-α or IL1β (Andreakos et al., 2003). Taken together, measurement of the levels of MMP1 produced by activated SFs is a readout that is highly relevant in the context of RA as this event reflects the level of activation of SFs towards an erosive phenotype as it is seen in the pannus. If a reduced expression of a candidate drug target in activated SFs leads to the reduction of MMP1 expression by these cells, the drug target is then proven to be involved in the regulation of MMP1 expression and thus considered relevant for the development of therapeutic strategies for the treatment of RA.

In the following examples, the development of an assay, further referred to as ‘MMP assay’, monitors the MMP1 production by synovial fibroblasts (SFs) in response to diverse activating triggers (Example 2.1). The use of this assay is then described for the validation of gene products that are considered drug targets for the development of RA therapies (Example 2.2). The validation of drug targets is performed using recombinant adenoviruses, further referred to as knock-down viruses or Ad-siRNAs, that mediate the expression in cells of shRNA's which reduce the expression levels of targeted genes by a RNAi (RNA interference)-based mechanism (see WO 03/020931). The identification of compounds modulating the activity of the validated drug targets is then described in Table 3. The use of the ‘MMP assay’ for the testing of compounds that modulate the activity of the drug targets identified is described further below.

Assay Examples

Control Viruses Used:

The control viruses used in these studies are listed below. dE1/dE2A adenoviruses are generated from these adapter plasmids by co-transfection of the helper plasmid pWEAd5Af1II-rITR.dE2A in PER.E2A packaging cells, as described in WO99/64582.

Negative Control Viruses:

Ad5-eGFP_KD: Target sequence: GCTGACCCTGAAGTTCATC (SEQ ID NO: 1). Cloned using Sap1-sites into vector and virus generated as described in WO03/020931.

Ad5-Luc_v13_KD: Target sequence GGTTACCTAAGGGTGTGGC (SEQ ID NO: 2). Cloned using Sap1-sites into vector and virus generated as described in WO03/020931.

Ad5-M6PR_v1_KD: Target sequence CTCTGAGTGCAGTGAAATC (SEQ ID NO: 3). Cloned using Sap1-sites into vector and virus generated as described in WO03/020931.

Positive Control Viruses:

Ad5-MMP1_v10_KD: Target sequence ACAAGAGCAAGATGTGGAC (SEQ ID NO: 4). Cloned using Sap1-sites into vector and virus generated as described in WO03/020931.

Viruses Used for Target Validation:

Ad5-MAPKAPK5_v13_KD: Target sequence CGGCACTTTACAGAGAAGC (SEQ ID NO: 5). Cloned using Sap1-sites into vector and virus generated as described in WO03/020931.

Ad5-MAPKAPK5_v12_KD: Target sequence ATGATGTGTGCCACACACC (SEQ ID NO: 6). Cloned using Sap1-sites into vector and virus generated as described in WO03/020931.

EXAMPLE 2.1 Development of the MMP Assay

A 384-well format ELISA for measurement of MMP1 is developed. Various primary antibodies are tested, as well as various ELISA protocols. The following protocol is developed and validated to measure MMP1 levels in SF supernatant in 384 well plates: white Lumitrac 600 384 well plates (Greiner) are coated with 2 μg/mL anti-MMP1 antibody MAB1346 (Chemicon). The antibody is diluted in buffer 40 (1.21 g Tris base (Sigma), 0.58 g NaCl (Calbiochem) and 5 ml 10% NaN₃ (Sigma) in 1 L milliQ water and adjusted to pH 8.5). After overnight incubation at 4° C., plates are washed with PBS (80 g NaCl, 2 g KCl (Sigma), 11.5 g Na₂HPO₄.7H₂O and 2 g KH₂PO₄ in 10 L milliQ; pH 7.4) and blocked with 100 μL/well Casein buffer (2% Casein (VWR International) in PBS). Next day, casein buffer is removed from ELISA plates and replaced by 50 μL/well EC buffer (4 g casein, 2.13 g Na₂HPO₄ (Sigma), 2 g bovine albumin (Sigma), 0.69 g NaH₂PO₄.H₂O (Sigma), 0.5 g CHAPS (Roche), 23.3 g NaCl, 4 ml 0.5 M EDTA pH 8 (Invitrogen), 5 ml 10% NaN₃ in 1 L milliQ and adjusted to pH 7.0). 0.25 mM DTT (Sigma) is added to the thawed samples plates. After removal of the EC buffer, 20 μL of sample is transferred to the ELISA plates. After overnight incubation at 4° C. plates are washed twice with PBS and once with PBST (PBS with 0.05% Tween-20 (Sigma)) and incubated with 35 μL/well biotinylated anti-MMP1 antibody solution (R&D). This secondary antibody is diluted in buffer C (0.82 g NaH₂PO₄.H₂O, 4.82 g Na₂HPO₄, 46.6 g NaCl, 20 g bovine albumin and 4 mL 0.5M EDTA pH 8 in 2 L milliQ and adjusted to pH 7.0) at a concentration of 5 μg/mL. After 2 h of incubation at RT, plates are washed as described above and incubated with 50 μL/well streptavidin-HRP conjugate (Biosource). Streptavidin-HRP conjugate is diluted in buffer C at a concentration of 0.25 μg/mL. After 45 min, plates are washed as described above and incubated for 5 min with 50 μL/well BM Chem ELISA Substrate (Roche). Readout is performed on the Luminoscan Ascent Luminometer (Labsystems) with an integration time of 200 msec or with an Envision reader (Perkin Elmer).

The increase of MMP1 expression by SFs upon treatment with cytokines relevant in the field of RA (TNF-α, IL1β and OSM) or a combination thereof is shown in FIG. 2 as white bars. For this experiment, SFs are seeded in 96 well plates, 3,000 cells/well. 24 h later, the medium is changed to M199 medium supplemented with 1% FBS. One day after the medium change, cytokines or combinations thereof are added to the cultures, each cytokine being added to a final concentration of 25 ng/mL. 72 h after cytokine addition, the supernatant is collected and processed in the MMP1 ELISA as described in the protocol given above. In parallel with this experiment, SFs are triggered, using the same protocol, with the supernatant of THP1 cells (2-fold diluted in M199+1% FBS) treated with the same cytokines or combinations of cytokines for 48 h in M199 medium+1% FBS. MMP1 levels for these samples are shown in FIG. 2 as grey bars. The induction of the MMP1 expression by SFs triggered with the supernatants of TNF-α-treated THP1 cells is stronger (>4.5 fold induction) as compared to the SFs triggered with recombinant TNF-α alone (3-fold induction) and almost equals the 5-fold induction obtained by a mixture of 3 purified cytokines (TNF-α, IL1βb, OSM). This result indicates that the supernatant of TNF-α-induced THP1 cells contains, besides TNF-α, additional pro-inflammatory factors that activate SFs towards MMP1 expression. As the role of TNF-α in the RA pathogenesis is validated (TNF-α-blockers such as Infliximab and Etanercept show some efficacy in the treatment of RA patients) and the THP-1 cells are representative for monocytes/macrophages present in the joint of RA patients, the TNF-α-based trigger mixture prepared by contacting THP-1 cells with TNF-α will contain factors present in the joints of RA patients and subsequently is relevant to RA. This TNF-α-based complex trigger, further referred to as the ‘complex trigger’, will further be used as basis for the ‘MMP assay’.

Inhibition of the activation of SF by the ‘complex trigger’ is shown using dexamethasone, a potent anti-inflammatory agent that also strongly reduces collagen-induced arthritis in rodents (Yang et al., 2004) (FIG. 3). Dexamethasone is shown to dose-dependently reduce amounts of MMP1 produced by complex trigger activated SFs. SFs are seeded at a density of 3000 cells/well in 96 well plates. 24 hrs after seeding, increasing concentrations of dexamethasone are added to the cells. After overnight incubation, medium of every well is refreshed to supernatant of THP-1 cells treated with TNF-α (50% diluted in M199+0.5% FBS), and the same concentration of dexamethasone as added the day before. 48 hrs after treatment, the supernatant is collected and subjected to the MMP1 ELISA described above. The addition of dexamethasone clearly reduced the MMP1 expression by SFs, with an IC₅₀ value of about 1 nM (see FIG. 3). These data show that the MMP1 expression by activated SFs can be reduced by the addition of a physiologically relevant inhibitor and represent a proof of principle for the ‘MMP assay’.

EXAMPLE 2.2 MAPKAPK5 Modulates SF ‘Complex Trigger’-Induced MMP1 Expression

(A) Ad-siRNA Virus Functions to Knock Down MAPKAPK5 Expression.

Recombinant adenoviruses mediating the expression of siRNA's targeting MAPKAPK5 and eGFP are generated according to the procedure described in WO03/020931. The target sequence used in the recombinant adenovirus is: CGGCACTTTACAGAGAAGC (SEQ ID NO: 5) as well as ATGATGTGTGCCACACACC (SEQ ID NO: 6). The target sequence within the eGFP mRNA used in the recombinant adenovirus is: GCTGACCCTGAAGTTCATC (SEQ ID NO: 1). These sequences are cloned into the adapter plasmid using Sap1 sites. dE1/dE2A adenoviruses are generated from these adapter plasmids by co-transfection of the helper plasmid pWEAd5Af1II-rITR.dE2A in PER.E2A packaging cells, as described in WO99/64582.

The functionality of an adenovirus targeting MAPKAPK5 is tested as follows. These adenoviruses are used to infect primary human SFs cultured in petri dishes as follows. On day 1, 500.000 SFs are seeded per petri dish. One day later, the cells are infected with Ad5-MAPKAPK5-v13_KD (1.6E9 VP/mL) or Ad5-eGFP-v5_KD (1.3E10 VP/mL) at an MOI of 4000 (based on the titers (number of virus particles per mL) defined for the viruses by Q-rt-PCR). On day 7, cells are detached from the petri dish according to standard procedure using a trypsin EDTA solution. The trypsin is then neutralized by addition of DMEM growth medium supplemented with 10% FBS. The cells are then collected by a centrifugation step (1000 rpm, 5 min). The pellet is lysed in 100 μL of fresh RIPA buffer (50 mM Tris pH7.5, 150 mM NaCl, 1% deoxycholate, 1% Triton X100, 0.1% SDS). The samples are then sonicated for 10 sec. The protein concentration of the samples is then determined using the BCA kit (Pierce, Cat No 23227) as described by the provider, using BSA as a standard. To 30 μg of cell lysate diluted to 19.5 μl in RIPA buffer, 3.5 μL of reducing agent (NuPage reducing agent No 10, Invitrogen NP0004) and 7.5 μL of sample buffer (NuPage LDS sample buffer, Invitrogen NP0007) are added. The 30 μL sample is then boiled for 5 min and loaded on a 10% polyacrylamide gel (Invitrogen NP0301). To allow the estimation of the level of protein knock-down, 15 μg, 7.5 μg and 3.75 μg of the lysate of the Ad5-eGFP-v5_KD infected cells are also loaded onto the gel. The gel is then run for 2 hours at 100V in 1×MOPS/SDS NuPage running buffer (Invitrogen NP001). 10 μl of Seablue Plus Prestained standard (Invitrogen LC5925) is used to estimate protein size on the gel. The proteins on the gel are then transferred onto a PVDF membrane (Invitrogen LC2002) by a wet blotting procedure using a transfer buffer prepared by mixing 100 ml Nupage Transfer buffer 20* (NP0006-1), 400 mL methanol and 1500 mL Milli Q water. Before the transfer, the membrane is first soaked in methanol and in transfer buffer. The transfer is performed at 100V for 90 minutes. The membrane is then blocked by 30 min soaking in blocking buffer (2% blocking blocking powder (Amersham, RPN 2109) prepared in PBST (PBS supplemented with 0.1% Tween 20 (Sigma, P1379)). After blocking, the immunodetection is performed using a mouse monoclonal antibody against MAPKAPK5 (BD Biosciences, Cat No 612080) diluted 250 fold in blocking buffer. After overnight incubation with this primary antibody, the membrane is washed 3 times with PBST and incubated 1 hr with the secondary antibody ((Polyclonal goat anti-mouse Ig, HRP conjugated (DAKO P0447) diluted 50000 fold in blocking buffer. The blot is then washed 3 times in PBST and the detection is performed with ECL advance (RPN2109, Amersham) on a Kodakimager according to the manufacturers instructions. The Western Blotting revealed a lower expression level of MAPKAPK5 in the Ad5-MAPKAPK5-v13_KD infected cells compared to the cells infected with the Ad5-eGFP-v5_KD negative control virus. Comparison with the diluted Ad5-eGFP-v5_KD infected samples allowed to estimate the reduction in expression to be 2-fold. Equal loading of the 30 μg samples is demonstrated by immunodetection of β-actin after removal of the MAPKAPK5 antibody by a ‘stripping procedure’ (5 minutes boiling of the membrane in PBST). Immunodetection of β-actin is performed according to the method described for MAPKAPK5 detection, but using a goat polyclonal antibody against β-actin (Santa Cruz, Cat N^(o) SC-1615) at a 1000 fold dilution as primary antibody and a rabbit anti goat antibody at a 50000 fold dilution as a secondary antibody. Results of this experiment are given in FIG. 4. Taken together, this experiment demonstrated the functionality of the Ad-siRNA virus produced to reduce the MAPKAPK5 expression levels in primary human SFs.

(B) MAPKAPK5 Knock-Down Ad-siRNA Reduces SF-Induced MMP1 Expression

The efficacy of Ad5-MAPKAPK5-v13_KD virus in the ‘MMP assay’ is tested as follows. Day 1, SFs (passage 9 to 10) are seeded in 96 well plates at a density of 3000 cells per well in complete synovial growth medium (Cell Applications). One day later, the cells are infected with increasing amounts (3, 6; 9, 12 or 15 μl) of following viruses: Ad5-eGFP-v5_KD, Ad5-MAPKAPK5-v12_KD, Ad5-MAPKAPK5-v13_KD, Ad5-MMP1-v10_KD. The virus load is corrected by addition of the neutral virus Ad5-Luc-v13_KD to bring the final virus volume on the cells to 15 μL in every well. This correction guarantees that the effects observed do not result from the virus load applied to the cells. The cells are then incubated for 5 days before the activation step. This step involves the replacement, in every well, of the growth medium by 75 μL of M199 medium supplemented with 25 μL of ‘complex trigger’. 48 hrs after the activation step, the supernatant is collected and subjected to the MMP1 ELISA as described in Example 1. The results of the experiment are shown in FIG. 5. The quality of the experiment is demonstrated by the efficacy of the Ad-siRNA virus targeting MMP1 itself. This positive control virus strongly reduces the MMP1 expression by SFs, whereas the negative control virus, designed to target the expression of luciferase, does not influence the levels of MMP1 expression. Two viruses used to validate the MAPKAPK5 target (Ad5-MAPKAPK5-v12_KD and Ad5-MAPKAPK5-v13) do also lead to a clear reduction of the complex trigger induced MMP1 expression by primary human SFs. It can be concluded, from this experiment, that MAPKAPK5 represents a valuable drug target that is shown to modulate MMP1 expression in SFs. Similarly, the inhibition of MAPKAPK5 enzymatic activity by a small molecule compound is expected to reduce the ‘complex cytokine’ induced MMP1 expression in the ‘MMP assay’. The inhibition of MAPKAPK5 enzymatic activity by a small molecule compound is also predicted to reduce the degradation of the joint associated with RA.

(C) In Vitro ‘MMP Assay’ Testing of Compounds Inhibiting MAPKAPK5

Compounds inhibiting the MAPKAPK5 activity in a biochemical assay (i.e. cell free, using purified enzyme), are tested in the ‘MMP assay’ according to following protocol.

The compound master stocks (all at 10 mM concentration in 100% DMSO) are diluted 10-fold in water (Distilled water, GIBCO, DNAse and RNAse free) to obtain a 1 mM intermediate work stock in 10% DMSO. This intermediate work stock is further diluted either 3-fold (or 10-fold) in 10% DMSO to obtain an intermediate work stock of 333 μM (or 100 μM) concentration, respectively, in 10% DMSO. The 1 mM as well as 333 μM (or 100 μM) intermediate work stocks are then further diluted 10-fold in 1.1% DMSO to obtain the 10× workstocks at 100 μM and 33.3 μM (or 10 μM) concentration in 2% DMSO. This 10× work stock is then diluted 10-fold in M199 medium supplemented with 1% FBS to obtain the final ‘1× compound preparation’ containing the compounds at 10 μM and 3.33 μM (or 1 μM) as well as 0.2% DMSO. These are the final conditions at which the compounds are tested on the cells. In parallel, the 10× work stock is diluted 10-fold in ‘complex trigger’ (i.e. the supernatant of TNF-α treated THP1 cells produced as described in Example 1) that is diluted 2-fold in M199 supplemented with 1% FBS to produce the ‘1× compound in 50% complex trigger preparation’.

At day 1, RASFs are seeded in 96 well plates (Flat bottom, tissue culture treated, Greiner) at a density of 3000 cells/well in complete synovial growth medium (Cell Applications). Day 5, the compounds are added to the cultured cells as follows. Medium is completely removed from the cells and replaced by 75 μL of the ‘1× compound preparations’ containing the compounds at either 10M or 3.33CM (or 1 μM) in M199 medium supplemented with 1% FBS and 0.2% DMSO. After an incubation period of 2 hours, which allows the compounds to equilibrate and enter the cells, 25 μL of the ‘1× compound in 50% complex trigger preparations’ are added to the wells on top of the ‘1× compound preparation’, in the wells containing the corresponding compounds at corresponding concentration. In this way, an 8-fold diluted complex trigger is ultimately applied to the cells. An incubation of 48 hrs is then performed and 20 μl of the cell supernatant is then processed in the MMP1 ELISA as described above, delivering raw data (RLU: relative luminescence units). Following controls are included in the experiments. A maximal signal control, in which the cells are activated by the complex trigger but only the 0.2% DMSO vehicle (and thus no compound) is added. This control indicates the maximal level of MMP1 that can be achieved in the test. A minimal signal control is also included in these experiments. Here, cells are not triggered. The medium of the cells is then changed to 100 μl M199 medium supplemented with 1% FBS at day 5. This control returns the basal MMP1 levels produced by the RASFs. The percent inhibition of the MMP1 expression achieved by the compounds is then calculated based on the RLU data returned by the ELISA with following formula: [[(maximal MMP1 levels−minimal MMP1 levels)−(MMP1 level compound X at concentration Y−minimal MMP1 levels)]/(maximal MMP1 levels−minimal MMP1 levels)]×100.

Toxicity of the compounds is assessed as follows. Day 1, SFs are seeded in white, tissue culture treated 96 well plates at a density of 3000 cells per well in 100 μL complete synovial growth medium. The compound handling, compound addition to the cells as well as activation of the cells is further performed as described above in this example for the determination of the MMP1 levels. After the 48 hrs incubation period, the medium is removed from the wells, replaced by 50 μL fresh M199 medium supplemented with 1% FBS. 50 μL of substrate (Promega Celltiter Glow cell viability kit) is then added to the wells. After an incubation period of 10 min, luminescence signal is measured. A reduction of the luminescence signal by more than 50% as compared to the maximal control wells is considered to reflect significant toxicity. No toxicity is observed for the compounds tested in the ‘MMP assay’.

It should be understood that factors such as the differential cell penetration capacity of the various compounds can contribute to discrepancies between the activity of the compounds in the in vitro biochemical and cellular MMP assays.

For the purpose of Table 3 and Table 4 below, MMP1 EC₅₀ of each compound, which can be determined using the assay method described herein, is expressed as follows:

**** compound exhibited MMP1 EC₅₀ 1-100 nM

*** compound exhibited MMP1 EC₅₀ 101-500 nM

** compound exhibited MMP1 EC₅₀ 501-1000 nM

* compound exhibited MMP1 EC₅₀>1000 nM

TABLE 3 MMP1 Patent EC50 ID (nM) 1 * 2 * 3 *** 4 * 5 *** 6 *** 7 * 8 ** 9 ** 10 ** 11 *** 12 ** 13 *** 14 * 15 *** 16 * 17 * 18 ** 19 * 20 * 21 *** 22 * 23 * 24 *** 25 * 26 * 27 ** 28 ** 29 * 30 * 31 * 32 ** 33 *** 34 **** 35 *** 36 *** 37 ** 38 * 39 * 40 * 41 * 42 * 43 * 44 * 45 * 46 * 47 ** 48 *** 49 * 50 *** 51 ** 52 * 53 ** 54 *** 55 *** 56 ** 57 *** 58 *** 59 * 60 * 61 ** 62 * 63 *** 64 * 65 *** 66 ** 67 * 68 * 69 * 70 * 71 * 72 * 73 * 74 * 75 * 76 ** 77 * 78 * 79 ** 80 *** 81 * 82 * 83 * 84 * 85 * 86 * 87 *** 88 ** 89 ** 90 * 91 * 92 *** 93 * 94 * 95 * 96 * 97 * 98 * 99 * 100 * 101 * 102 * 103 ** 104 * 105 * 106 107 108 * 109 * 110 * 111 * 112 * 113 *** 114 * 115 * 116 * 117 *** 168 * 169 * 170 * 171 * 172 * 173 * 174 * 175 * 176 ** 177 * 178 * 179 * 180 * 181 * 182 * 183 * 184 * 185 *

TABLE 4 Patent MMP1 ID EC₅₀ (nM) 118 * 119 * 120 * 121 * 122 * 123 * 124 * 125 * 126 * 127 * 128 * 129 * 130 * 131 * 132 * 133 * 134 ** 135 136 * 137 * 138 * 139 * 140 * 141 * 142 * 143 * 144 145 * 146 * 147 * 148 * 149 * 150 * 151 * 152 * 153 * 154 * 155 * 156 * 157 * 158 * 159 * 160 * 161 * 162 * 163 * 164 * 165 * 166 * 167 * 191 * 192 *** 193 * 194 ** 195 * 196 * 197 * 198 *

EXAMPLE 3 Assay to Assess Effect of Compounds on Cytokine Release by Human PBMCs

Human peripheral blood mononuclear cells (PBMCs) are isolated from “buffy coats” prepared from the blood of healthy volunteers, isolated essentially according to method of Bøyum (1984). In brief, buffy coat is diluted 1:1 with 1×PBS (Gibco) and 30 mL is carefully put on top of 20 mL Lymphoprep™ (Lucron Bioproducts) in 50 mL Falcon tubes. After centrifugation (35 min, 400 g, 18° C.) the mononuclear cells are collected from the white interphase and washed 3 times with 1×PBS by resuspending and centrifugation (10 min, 200 g). Isolated PBMCs are finally resuspended in RPMI 1640 (Cat. No. 21875, Gibco) that is supplemented with 10% heat-inactivated FBS (Hyclone).

For the assay PBMCs are seeded at 2.5E6 cells/mL in 160 μL in 96-well plates (Nunc). Serial dilution of the test compounds are made first in DMSO (Sigma) and then diluted 50-fold in M199 medium (Gibco) containing 1% heat-inactivated FBS. Compounds are further 1/10 diluted in the assay plates to obtain final DMSO concentration of 0.2%. Cells are preincubated with the compounds for 1 hr at 37° C., 5% CO₂. Then, cells are stimulated with LPS (Escherichia coli serotype 026:B6, Cat. No. L2654, Sigma) that is added in a volume of 20 μL to a final concentration of 1 μg/mL and cells are further cultured for 24 hr. The plates are centrifuged and the supernatant is collected and stored at −80° C. until analysis of appropriate dilutions in ELISAs.

The following 384-well chemiluminescent ELISA protocol was developed to measure TNFα levels in the supernatant: White Lumitrac 600 384-well plates (Greiner) are coated with (40 μL/well) anti-TNFα capture antibody (Cat. No. 551220, BD Pharmingen) that is diluted to 1 μg/mL in 1×PBS (Gibco). After overnight incubation at 4° C., plates are washed with 1×PBS (80 g NaCl, 2 g KCl (Sigma), 11.5 g Na₂HPO₄.7H2O and 2 g KH₂PO₄ in 10 L milliQ; pH 7.4) and blocked with 100 μL/well buffer B (1×PBS containing 1% BSA (Sigma), 5% sucrose (Sigma) and 0.05% NaN₃ (Sigma)). After 4 hr incubation at RT, blocking buffer is removed and plates are washed once with PBST (1×PBS with 0.05% Tween-20 (Sigma)). Then, 40 μL of sample is transferred to the ELISA plates and plates are incubated at 4° C. Next day, plates are washed 3 times (twice with PBST and once with PBS) and 35 μL/well biotinylated anti-TNFα antibody (Cat. No. 554511, BD Pharmingen) diluted first to a concentration of 250 ng/ml in buffer D (1×PBS with 1% BSA) is added. After 2 h of incubation at RT, plates are washed as described above and 35 μL/well of a 1/2000 dilution of streptavidin-HRP conjugate (Cat. No. SNN2004, Biosource) in buffer D is added. After 45 min, plates are washed as described above and incubated for 5 min with 50 μL/well BM Chemiluminescence ELISA Substrate POD (Roche). Readout is performed on the Luminoscan Ascent Luminometer (Labsystems) with an integration time of 100 msec delivering raw data (RLU: relative luminescence units). The following controls are included in the experiments, a maximal signal control, in which the cells are activated by LPS but only the 0.2% DMSO vehicle (and thus no compound) is added. This control indicates the maximal level of TNFα that can be achieved in the test. A minimal signal control is also included in these experiments. Here, cells are not triggered. This control returns the basal TNFα levels produced by the PBMCs. The percent inhibition (PIN) of the TNFα release, achieved by the compounds is then calculated based on the RLU data returned by the ELISA with following formula: 100−[((TNFα level compound X at concentration Y−minimal TNFα levels)/maximal TNFα levels−minimal TNFα levels))×100]. Where compounds are tested at 8 concentrations (1/3 serial dilution), EC50-values can be calculated by curve fitting of the means of the PIN data achieved for a compound at each test concentration.

To assay the effect of compounds on the release of IL1 and IL6 by LPS stimulated PBMC cultures, appropriate dilutions of the supernatant can be measured using the same ELISA protocol as described above. Matched pair antibodies for IL1 and IL6 ELISA (all from R&D Systems) may be used as follows: anti-IL1 capture antibody (Cat. No. MAB601) used at 0.5 μg/mL, biotinylated anti-IL1 detection antibody (Cat. No. BAF201) used at 50 ng/mL; anti-IL6 capture antibody (Cat. No. MAB206) used at 1 μg/mL; biotinylated anti-IL6 detection antibody (Cat. No. BAF206) used at 50 ng/mL.

For the purpose of Table 5 below, PBMC EC₅₀ of each compound, which can be determined using the assay method described herein, is expressed as follows:

#### compound exhibited PBMC EC₅₀ 1-100 nM

### compound exhibited PBMC EC₅₀ 101-500 nM

## compound exhibited PBMC EC₅₀ 501-1000 nM

# compound exhibited PBMC EC₅₀>1000 nM

TABLE 5 Patent ID PBMC EC₅₀ (nM) 1 # 2 # 3 # 4 # 5 # 6 # 7 # 8 # 9 ### 10 # 11 # 12 # 13 # 14 # 15 ## 16 # 17 # 18 # 19 # 20 # 21 # 22 # 23 # 24 # 25 # 26 ## 27 # 28 # 29 # 30 # 31 # 32 ### 33 # 34 # 34 # 35 # 36 # 36 # 36 # 36 # 36 # 36 # 37 # 38 # 39 # 40 ## 41 # 42 # 43 ### 43 ## 43 # 43 # 43 # 44 # 45 # 46 # 47 # 48 # 49 # 50 # 51 # 52 # 53 # 54 ## 54 # 56 # 57 # 58 # 59 # 60 # 61 # 62 ## 62 ## 63 # 64 # 65 # 66 # 67 # 68 # 69 # 70 # 71 # 72 # 73 # 74 # 75 # 76 # 77 # 78 ## 79 # 81 # 84 # 85 # 86 # 87 # 88 #### 88 # 89 # 90 # 91 # 92 # 94 # 99 ## 101 # 102 # 103 ### 104 # 105 # 108 # 110 # 113 # 115 # 116 # 117 # 169 # 170 # 171 ## 172 # 174 # 176 # 179 # 180 # 181 #

The present invention relates also to a method of treatment or prevention of inflammatory diseases, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective inhibitor of Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase-Activated Protein Kinase 5 inhibiting amount of a compound according to Formula 1.

Another aspect of the present method invention relates to a method of treatment or prophylaxis of a condition characterised by abnormal matrix metallo proteinase activity, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective amount of a matrix metallo proteinase inhibiting compound according to Formula 1.

A further aspect of the present method invention is a method of treatment or prophylaxis of a condition selected from diseases involving degradation of extra-cellular matrix, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective matrix metallo proteinase inhibiting amount of a compound according to Formula 1.

A yet further aspect of the present method invention is a method of treatment or prophylaxis of a condition selected from diseases involving abnormal cellular expression of MMP1, which comprises administering a therapeutically effective matrix metallo proteinase inhibiting amount of a compound according to Formula 1.

A special embodiment of the present method invention is a method of treatment or prevention of rheumatoid arthritis, which comprises administering to a subject in need thereof, a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to Formula 1.

This invention also relates to the use of the present compounds in the manufacture of a medicament for treatment or prophylaxis of a condition prevented, ameliorated or eliminated by administration of an inhibitor of Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase-Activated Protein Kinase 5, or a condition characterised by abnormal collagenase activity, or a condition selected from diseases involving inflammation, most preferably in for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis.

Administering of the compound of the present invention to the subject patient includes both self-administration and administration by another person. The patient may be in need of treatment for an existing disease or medical condition, or may desire prophylactic treatment to prevent or reduce the risk for diseases and medical conditions affected by a disturbance in bone metabolism. The compound of the present invention may be delivered to the subject patient orally, transdermally, via inhalation, injection, nasally, rectally or via a sustained release formulation.

A preferred regimen of the present method comprises the administration to a subject in suffering from a disease condition characterized by inflammatory, with an effective matrix metallo-protease inhibiting amount of a compound of the present invention for a period of time sufficient to reduce the abnormal levels of extracellular matrix degradation in the patient, and preferably terminate, the self-perpetuating processes responsible for said degradation. A special embodiment of the method comprises administering of an effective matrix metallo-protease inhibiting amount of a compound of the present invention to a subject patient suffering from or susceptible to the development of rheumatoid arthritis, for a period of time sufficient to reduce or prevent, respectively, collagen and bone degradation in the joints of said patient, and preferably terminate, the self-perpetuating processes responsible for said degradation.

Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Compounds that exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.

The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.

A preferred therapeutically effective amount of the compound of the present invention to administer to a subject patient is about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10 mg/kg administered from once to three times a day. For example, an effective regimen of the present method may administer about 5 mg to about 1000 mg of said compound of the present invention from once to three times a day. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level for any particular subject patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular inflammatory condition. A consideration of these factors is well within the purview of the ordinarily skilled clinician for the purpose of determining the therapeutically effective or prophylactically effective dosage amount needed to prevent, counter, or arrest the progress of the condition.

Compounds of the invention can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration. Such compositions typically comprise at least one compound of the invention and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As used herein the language “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” is intended to include solid carriers such as lactose, magnesium stearate, terra alba, sucrose, talc, stearic acid, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia or the like; and liquids such as vegetable oils, arachis oil and sterile water, or the like, any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. This listing of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers is not to be construed as limiting. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.

A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. The pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.

Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor ELTM (BASF, Parsippany, N.J.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyetheylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action of microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, 'chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum mono stearate and gelatin.

Sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound (e.g., a compound according to an embodiment of the invention) in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and the required other ingredients from those enumerated above. In the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.

Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. Oral compositions can also be prepared using a fluid carrier for use as a mouthwash, wherein the compound in the fluid carrier is applied orally and swished and expectorated or swallowed.

Pharmaceutically compatible binding agents, and/or adjuvant materials can be included as part of the composition. The tablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like can contain any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate or Sterotes; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.

For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.

Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art.

The compounds can also be prepared in the form of suppositories (e.g., with conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter and other glycerides) or retention enemas for rectal delivery.

In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art.

It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.

The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.

A compound according to an embodiment of the invention may be provided as a salt, preferably as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of compounds of formula I. Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable salts of these compounds include those derived from organic acids such as acetic acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, lactic acid, oxalic acid, succinic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, benzoic acid, salicylic acid, phenylacetic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulphonic acid, benzenesulphonic acid and p-toluenesulphonic acid, mineral acids such as hydrochloric and sulphuric acid and the like, giving methanesulphonate, benzenesulphonate, p-toluenesulphonate, hydrochloride and sulphate, and the like, respectively or those derived from bases such as organic and inorganic bases. Examples of suitable inorganic bases for the formation of salts of compounds for this invention include the hydroxides, carbonates, and bicarbonates of ammonia, lithium, sodium, calcium, potassium, aluminium, iron, magnesium, zinc and the like. Salts can also be formed with suitable organic bases. Such bases suitable for the formation of pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts with compounds of the present invention include organic bases which are nontoxic and strong enough to form salts. Such organic bases are already well known in the art and may include amino acids such as arginine and lysine, mono-, di-, or trihydroxyalkylamines such as mono-, di-, and triethanolamine, choline, mono-, di-, and trialkylamines, such as methylamine, dimethylamine, and trimethylamine, guanidine; N-methylglucosamine; N-methylpiperazine; morpholine; ethylenediamine; N-benzylphenethylamine; tris(hydroxymethyl)aminomethane; and the like.

Salts of compounds according to an embodiment of the invention may be prepared in a conventional manner using methods well known in the art. Acid addition salts of said basic compounds may be prepared by dissolving the free base compounds according to the first or second aspects of the invention in aqueous or aqueous alcohol solution or other suitable solvents containing the required acid. Where a compound of the invention contains an acidic function, a base salt of said compound may be prepared by reacting said compound with a suitable base. The acid or base salt may separate directly or can be obtained by concentrating the solution e.g. by evaporation. The compounds of this invention may also exist in solvated or hydrated forms.

It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the foregoing description is exemplary and explanatory in nature, and is intended to illustrate the invention and its preferred embodiments. Through routine experimentation, an artisan will recognise apparent modifications and variations that may be made without departing from the spirit of the invention. Thus, the invention is intended to be defined not by the above description, but by the following claims and their equivalents.

REFERENCES

-   Choy E H, Panayi G S. (2001). N Engl J Med. 344: 907-16. -   Firestein G S. (2003). Nature. 423:356-61. -   Smolen J S, Steiner G. (2003). Nat Rev Drug Discov. 2: 473-88. -   Lee D M, Weinblatt M E (2001). Lancet. 358: 903-11. -   Kremer J. M., Westhovens R., Leon M., Di Giorgio E., Alten R.,     Steinfeld S., Russell A., Dougados M., Emery P., Nuamah I. F.,     Williams G. R., Becker J.-C., Hagerty D.-T., Moreland L. W. (2003) N     Engl J Med. 349:1907-1915. -   Edwards J. C. W., Szczepanski L., Szechinski J.,     Filipowicz-Sosnowska A., Emery P., Close D. R., Stevens R. M.,     Shaw T. (2004) N Engl J Med. 350:2572-2581. -   O'Dell J R, Leff R, Paulsen G, Haire C, Mallek J, Eckhoff P J,     Fernandez A, Blakely K, Wees S, Stoner J, Hadley S, Felt J, Palmer     W, Waytz P, Churchill M, Klassen L, Moore G. (2002) Arthritis Rheum.     46:1164-70. -   St Clair E W, van der Heijde D M, Smolen J S, Maini R N, Bathon J M,     Emery P, Keystone E, Schiff M, Kalden J R, Wang B, Dewoody K, Weiss     R, Baker D; (2004) Combination of infliximab and methotrexate     therapy for early rheumatoid arthritis: a randomized, controlled     trial. Arthritis Rheum. 50 :3432-43. -   Gomez-Reino J J, et al. (2003). Arthritis Rheum. 48: 2122-7. -   O'Dell J R. (2004) Therapeutic strategies for rheumatoid arthritis.     N Engl J Med. 350(25):2591-602. -   New L, Jiang Y, Han J. (2003) Regulation of PRAK subcellular     location by p38 MAP kinases. Mol Biol Cell. 14(6):2603-16. -   Shi Y, Kotlyarov A, Laabeta K, Gruber A D, Butt E, Marcus K, Meyer H     E, Friedrich A, Volk H D, Gaestel M. (2003) Elimination of protein     kinase MK5/PRAK activity by targeted homologous recombination. Mol     Cell Biol. 23:7732-41. -   Seternes O M, Mikalsen T, Johansen B, Michaelsen E, Armstrong C G,     Morrice N A, Turgeon B, Meloche S, Moens U, Keyse S M. (2004)     Activation of MK5/PRAK by the atypical MAP kinase ERK3 defines a     novel signal transduction pathway. EMBO J. 23:4780-91. -   Andreakos E, et al. (2003). Arthritis Rheum. 48: 1901-12. -   Cunnane G, et al. (2001). Arthritis Rheum 44: 2263-74. -   Coussens L M, et al. (2002). Science 295: 2387-92. -   Creemers E E, et al. (2001). Circ Res. 2001 89:201-10 -   Gapski R, et al. (2004). J Periodontol. 75:441-52. -   Reif S, Somech R, Brazovski E, Reich R, Belson A, Konikoff F M,     Kessler A. (2005) Digestion. 71:124-130. -   Rosenberg G A. (2002). Glia. 39:279-91. -   Schanstra J P, et al. (2002). J Clin Invest. 110:371-9. -   Suzuki R, et al. (2004). Treat Respir Med. 3:17-27.

From the foregoing description, various modifications and changes in the compositions and methods of this invention will occur to those skilled in the art. All such modifications coming within the scope of the appended claims are intended to be included therein.

It should be understood that factors such as the differential cell penetration capacity of the various compounds can contribute to discrepancies between the activity of the compounds in the in vitro biochemical and cellular assays.

All publications, including but not limited to patents and patent applications, cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference herein as though fully set forth.

The chemical names of compounds of the invention given in this application are generated using MDL's ISIS Draw Autonom Software tool and are not verified. Preferably, in the event of inconsistency, the depicted structure governs. 

1. A compound according to formula III:

wherein R¹ is H, or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl; R⁸ is

L is selected from a single bond, alkylene, —O—, —N(R^(8e))—, —CO—, —CO₂—, —SO—, —SO₂—, —CON(R^(8e))—, —SO₂N(R^(8e))—, —N(R^(8e))CO—, —N(R^(8e))SO₂—, —N(R^(8e))CON(R^(8e))—, —N(R^(8e))SO₂ N(R^(8e))—; —O(CR^(8e) ₂)_(m1)—, or —CON(R^(8e))(CR^(8e) ₂)_(m1)—; each R^(8a) is independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, and halo; R^(8d) is selected from substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl; R^(8e) is selected from H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl and substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; the subscript m is 1, 2, 3, or 4; the subscript n is 1, 2, 3, or 4; and R⁹ is independently selected from substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof; and stereoisomers, and tautomers thereof.
 2. A compound according to claim 1, wherein R⁸ is

wherein L, the subscript n, R^(8a), and R^(8d) are as in claim
 1. 3. A compound according to claim 2, wherein L is a single bond, —CO—, —O(CH₂)_(m1)—, —CON(H)(CH₂)_(m1)—, or —NHCO—; the subscript m1 is selected from 1-4; and R^(8d) is

and wherein the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl.
 4. A compound according to formula IVd:

and wherein L is a single bond, —CO—, —O(CH)_(m1)—, —CON(H)(CH₂)_(m1)—, or —NHCO—; the subscript m1 is selected from 1-4; the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl; the subscript n, is selected from 1-4; each R^(8a) is independently selected from hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, alkoxy, cyano, and halo; and R⁹ is independently selected from substituted or unsubstituted aryl and heteroaryl; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof; and stereoisomers, isotopic variants and tautomers thereof.
 5. A compound according to claim 4, wherein L is a single bond.
 6. A compound according to claim 4, wherein L is —CO—.
 7. A compound according to claim 4, wherein L is —NHCO—.
 8. A compound according to claim 4, wherein L is —CON(H)—CH₂—CH₂—, or —N(H)—CO—CH₂—CH₂—.
 9. A compound according to claim 4, wherein L is —OCH₂—CH₂— or —NHCH₂—CH₂—.
 10. A compound according to any one of claims 4-9, wherein the ring P is substituted or unsubstituted piperidine, morpholine or piperazine.
 11. A compound according to claim 4, wherein each R^(8a) is H.
 12. A compound according to claim 4, wherein subscript n is 1 and R^(8a) is Me, Et, Pr, iso-Pr, Cl, F, CN, OMe, or CF₃.
 13. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the compound is according to formula Vc or Vf:

and wherein R⁹ is as in claim 1 and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.
 14. A compound according to claim 13, wherein R^(8b) is H.
 15. A compound according to claim 13, wherein R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstiuted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.
 16. A compound according to claim 13, wherein R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CH₂CONH₂, cyclopropyl or cyclopropylmethyl.
 17. A compound according to claim 1, wherein R⁹ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
 18. A compound according to claim 1, wherein R⁹ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.
 19. A compound according to claim 1, wherein R⁹ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
 20. A compound according to claim 1, wherein R⁹ is selected from substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, pyridyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, pyrrolyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, and thiazolyl.
 21. A compound according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4 and 13, wherein R⁹ is

and each of A¹, A² and A³ is independently selected from S, O, N, NR^(9a), and CR^(9a); each of R^(9a) is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl; and R^(9b) is CONH₂, CONHMe, or CN.
 22. A compound according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4 and 13, wherein R⁹ is


23. A compound according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4 and 13, wherein R⁹ is


24. A compound according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4 and 13, wherein R⁹ is

and wherein the subscript m is selected from 1-4 and each R^(9d) is independently H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or halo.
 25. A compound according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4 and 13, wherein R⁹ is

and wherein the subscript m is selected from 1-4 and each R^(9d) is independently H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or halo.
 26. A compound according to any one of claims 1, 2, 4 and 13, wherein R⁹ is

and wherein the subscript m is selected from 1-3 and each R^(9d) is independently H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or halo.
 27. A compound according to claim 24, wherein each R^(9d) is H.
 28. A compound according to claim 24, wherein m is 1 or 2 and each R^(9d) is Me, Cl or F.
 29. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the compound is according to formula VIc or VIf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.
 30. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the compound is according to formula VIIc or VIIf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.
 31. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the compound is according to formula VIIIc or VIIIf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.
 32. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the compound is according to formula IXc or IXf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.
 33. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the compound is according to formula Xc or Xf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl.
 34. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the compound is according to formula XIc or XIf:

and R^(8b) is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; and R^(9e) is hydrogen, Me, or CN.
 35. A compound according to any one of claims 29-34, wherein R^(8b) is H.
 36. A compound according to any one of claims 29-34, wherein R^(8b) is cycloalkyl.
 37. A compound according to any one of claims 29-34, wherein R^(8b) is cyclopropyl.
 38. A compound according to any one of claims 29-34, wherein R^(8b) is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.
 39. A compound according to any one of claims 29-34, wherein R^(8b) is Me, Et, Pr, i-Pr, t-Bu, i-Bu, CF₃, CH₂CF₃, CH₂CONH₂, or cyclopropylmethyl.
 40. A compound according to claim 1, wherein the compound is according to formula XIVc:

and L is a bond, —CO—, or —O—CH₂—CH₂—; the ring P is

and R^(8b) is H, Me, i-Pr, t-Bu, CH₂CONH₂, cyclopropylmethyl, or CH₂CF₃.
 41. A compound according to claim 40, wherein L is a bond and the ring P is


42. A compound according to claim 25, wherein each R^(9d) is H.
 43. A compound according to claim 26, wherein each R^(9d) is H.
 44. A compound according to claim 25, wherein m is 1 or 2 and each R^(9d) is Me, Cl or F.
 45. A compound according to claim 26, wherein m is 1 or 2 and each R^(9d) is Me, Cl or F.
 46. A compound according to claim 1 wherein the compound is 5-[8-(2-Morpholin-4-yl-pyrimidin-5-ylamino)-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl]-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one; and 5-{8-[2-(4-Isopropyl-piperazin-1-yl)-pyrimidin-5-ylamino]-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrazin-5-yl}-2,3-dihydro-isoindol-1-one.
 47. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of claim
 1. 48. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 47, wherein the carrier is a parenteral carrier.
 49. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 47, wherein the carrier is an oral carrier.
 50. The pharmaceutical composition of claim 47, wherein the carrier is a topical carrier. 